2011 Technical Binder

Philips Dynalite Lighting Systems and Controls

Dear Colleague,

Welcome to our updated Technical Binder; your complete guide to the Philips Dynalite award-winning range of innovative lighting control products. As an industry leader in the creation of energy efficient and innovative lighting control solutions, this technical binder is just one way Philips Dynalite brings you comprehensive advice on enhancing the design and functionality of your next project. Our world-leading products succeed because they bring together scalability, flexibility and innovation, in a smart way to get better results for our customers. Inside, you’ll discover how Philips Dynalite control solutions can work for you. Section One is designed to assist you in accessing additional, valuable marketing collateral. Section Two contains comprehensive information on our complete range of hardware and software products that enable standard and advanced levels of lighting control, energy management and seamless integration with third-party systems. Section Three contains updated application guides based on real-world applications; scenarios you’ll probably encounter on a daily basis. The guides contain simple advice and techniques for getting the best result for your project. We’ll be regularly adding to and updating this section as technologies change. Of course, timely advice is always available from your local Philips Dynalite contact or the website. Section Four contains technical guides with practical information on how the system goes together, control principles, load compatibility, programming methods, systems integration and more. As we invest heavily in research and development, we are constantly introducing new products and using the latest technology as a platform for growth and we’ll endeavour to regularly update this technical binder. Naturally, you’ll find the most up-to-date product information on our website. I’m confident the user-friendly information in this technical binder will inspire you to select Philips Dynalite as your controls solution in any future project – from a simple one dimmer, one panel system through to a huge multi-channel network. Finally, don’t forget to take advantage of our advisory service, which offers you our expertise on the most cost-effective ways to design a control system that meets the needs of your project. I hope you enjoy using this technical binder.

Peter Glasheen Global Marketing Manager Philips Dynalite

t +61 2 8338 9899 f +61 2 8338 9333 [email protected] www.philips.com/dynalite

Contents Section 1 Marketing Collateral Philips Dynalite Corporate Profile An Introduction to the Philips Dynalite Control System Marketing Collateral Overview

Section 2 Technical Data Sheets User Interfaces DR2PA DR2PE DPN DPNE DPN-SF DPNE-SF DLP DLPE DL2P DPWE DTP100 DTP170 DTC602 & DTCE602 DDTC001 DUS804C DUS804C-UP DUS704 DTS900 & DTS900M

Revolution Series User Control Panels - AU/US Size Revolution Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size Classic Series User Control Panels - AU/US Size Classic Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size Classic Series User Control Panels - AU/US Size Classic Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size Standard Series User Control Panels - AU/US Size Standard Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size Standard Series User Control Panels - AU/US size Standard Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size Colour Touchscreen Colour Touchscreen Timer Clock Timer Clock Multifunction Sensor Multifunction Sensor Universal Sensors Temperature Sensors

Relay and Multi-use Controllers DMRC210 DDRC810-GL DDRC810DT-GL DDRC420FR DDRC820FR DDRC1220FR-GL DRC1205 DRC810DT DRC1210 & DRC1220GL

2 x 10 Amp Relay Controller 8 x 10 Amp Relay Controller 8 x 10 Amp Mulit-use Relay Controller 4 x 20 Amp Relay Controller 8 x 20 Amp Relay Controller 12 x 20 Amp Relay Controller 12 x 5 Amp Relay Controller 8 x 10 Amp Relay Controller 12 x 10 Amp & 12 x 20 Amp Relay Controllers

Leading Edge Dimmer Controllers DDLE802 DLE1203 DLE405 DLE1205 DLE410 DLE1210GL DLE1210 DLE120-S DLE220-S DLE1220GL-S

8 x 2 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller 12 x 3 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller 4 x 5 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller 12 x 5 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller 4 x 10 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller 12 x 10 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller 12 x 10 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller 1 x 20 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller 2 x 20 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller 12 x 20 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller

Contents continued Trailing Edge Dimmer Controllers DTE310 DTE1210

3 x 10 Amp Trailing Edge Dimmer Controller 12 x 10 Amp Trailing Edge Dimmer Controller

Signal Dimmer Controllers DDBC516FR DBC905 DDBC120FR-DALI DDBC300-DALI DDBC320-DALI DMBC110 DBC410 DBC1205 DDBC1200 DBC1210 & DBC1220GL

Dimmer Controller 9 x 5 Amp Dimmer Controller Dimmer Controller Dimmer Controller Dimmer Controller 1 x 10 Amp Signal Dimmer & Relay Controller 4 x 10 Amp Dimmer Controller 12 x 5 Amp Dimmer Controller 12 x Signal Dimmer Controller 12 x 10 Amp & 12 x 20 Amp 1-10V/DSI Dimmer Controllers

LED PWM Controllers DDLEDC60035 DDLEDC401 DDLEDC605-GL

6 x 350mA PWM Controller 4 x 1 Amp PWM Controller 6 x 5 Amp PWM Controller

Multipurpose Controllers DDMC802 DDMC802GL DDLE6RC202 DMC810GL

8 x 2 Amp Multipurpose Modular Controller 8 x 2 Amp Multipurpose Modular Controller 6 x 2 Amp Leading Edge; 2 x 2 Amp relay Multipurpose Controller 4 x 10 Amp Leading Edge; 4 x 1- Amp Signal Dimmer Multipurpose Controller

Integration Devices DNG100BT DMNG100BT DDNG100BT DAC100BT DNG232 DMNG232 DDNG232 DDNG485 DDNI485 DNG485 DTK622 DDNI-LON DDNG-KNX DDNG-BACnet DDMIDC8 DPMI940 DIR-TX8 DDFCUC024

Ethernet Gateway Ethernet Gateway Ethernet Gateway Area Controller RS232 Network Gateway RS232 Network Gateway RS232 Network Gateway Network Gateway Network Passive Gateway RS485/DMX Gateway Network Gateway LON Gateway KNX Network Gateway BACnet Network Gateway Low Level Input Integrator Dry Contact Gateway Infra-red Transmitter Fan Coil Unit Controller

Contents continued Envision Software DLight III Server

Gateway Integration Software

Network Devices & Commissioning Tools DDNP1501 DDPB22RJ12 DyNet 305m DyNetSFLAT6 200m DPP601

Network Power Supply Network Junction Box Data Cable Pack Cable Roll and Cable Kits Portable Programmer

Section 3 Application Guides Aged care Apartment Boardroom Hotel ballroom Lecture theatre Luxury home Office Themed venue

Section 4 Technical Guides Control principles Emergency lighting LED control Load compatibility Programming methods Systems integration

1. Marketing Collateral

Marketing Collateral Philips Dynalite

Envision software

EcoSet

Sophisticated, productive, reliable and energy efficient lighting control solutions

Advanced lighting controls made easy – save energy, increase productivity and optimise user comfort

Removing complexity in lighting energy management

Envision software

EcoSet

A 12 page brochure providing an overview of Philips Dynalite, our market segments, locations, products and services.

An 8 page brochure on Envision – commissioning, operational and energy management software that makes your lighting programming a simple process.

A 6 page brochure on EcoSet – a networked lighting control system designed to leverage the benefits of occupancy based energy-savings technology.

Part number: CORP-0008

Part number: SW-0012

Part number: ECOS-0010

User Interfaces

Philips Dynalite Corporate Profile

DynamicTouch Apple iPad/iPhone Applications for smart automation

Smart hotel. Smart return.

Networked Controls Product Catalogue

Control solutions for hotels

DynamicTouch

Smart Hotel

A 4 page brochure on DynamicTouch – Apple iPad and iPhone applications for smart automation.

A 16 page brochure detailing Philips Dynalite’s solution for hotels – promoting guest comfort, brand differentiation and operational efficiency.

Part number: DT-0011

Part number: HOSP-0013

Ecolinx

An integrated lighting and energy management system

Ecolinx An 8 page brochure detailing Ecolinx, a fully integrated lighting energy management system for commercial environments. Part number: ECOL-0006

Philips Dynalite Marketing Collateral

Philips Dynalite Training Academy

Networked Controls Product Catalogue An 80 page comprehensive product catalogue on the Philips Dynalite product range and controls solutions. Part number: CAT-0015

An introduction to the

Philips Dynalite control system

Philips Dynalite Training Academy

Indoor Network Controls Product Catalogue

A 24 page brochure that gives an overview of the Philips Dynalite training courses and their content.

A 20 page brochure detailing the functionality of different applications and systems.

Part number: TRNG-0016

Part number: TECH-0004

Section 1.1

Marketing Collateral Bring to life your smart home experience!

Philips Dynalite Dimension Program

Revolution Re-think, re-invent, re-define.

Guide for Dealers

With a Philips Dynalite Dimension Dealer

DD-0006-1110-BMAUS-2.5K

Smart Home A 6 page brochure for home owners on automation technologies and benefits of using a Philips Dynalite Dimension Dealer. Part number: HOME-0018

Philips Dynalite Dimension Program Guide for Dealers

Revolution

A 12 page information brochure on becoming an accredited Philips Dynalite Dimension Dealer, member benefits, certification and training.

An 8 page brochure detailing the Revolution Panels – providing the ultimate user interface solution delivering complete aesthetic and functional flexibility.

Part number: DD-0006

Part number: GEN-0003

Lightnews

Volume 11

Lighting the way for ‘smart’ apartments

page 16 New app for Apple devices page 12

Westfield London: Lighting up an icon page 14

The critical role of LED control page 18

Smart Automation for all your applications It all comes together with your Philips Dynalite Dimension Dealer

Energy management for commercial buildings

Smart Automation for all your applications

Energy Management for Commercial Buildings

An 8 page brochure targeting designers, architects, builders, electrical contractors and systems integrators. Highlights benefits of using a Dimension Dealer for all your smart automation projects.

A 24 page informational brochure on energy management for commercial environments. Includes: green rating tools, guidelines, strategies and Philips Dynalite management systems.

Part number: SMRT-0026

Part number: EM-0017

Lightnews A Philips Dynalite global publication that is released three times a year. It includes the latest updates on products, news and projects.

To o r de r b ro ch u r es Please contact your local Philips Dynalite Representative to get a copy of our brochures. N.B. Brochures and information within may vary in regions due to local customisation and product differentiation. If brochures are updated or replaced, we will endeavour to send you the most up-to-date version available at time of ordering.

Section 1.2

Philips Dynalite Marketing Collateral

2. Technical Datasheets

User Interfaces

Providing end-users with an intuitive means of interaction with the lighting system, Philips Dynalite user interfaces come in a wide range of styles and finishes to match any project budget or décor requirements. This range includes wall panels, touchscreens, universal sensors, timer clocks and temperature sensors.

DR2PA

Revolution Series User Control Panels

The second generation DR2P Revolution series user control panels incorporate a clip-on cover fastening system which provides the ultimate in aesthetic design flexibility. DR2P series panels are available in a range of configurations including single column, which provides arrangements of one to eight buttons and double or triple column designs for up to twenty four buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Button backlighting is also provided to illuminate engraved text, improving night time panel location and operation. Optional Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities are available, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remote control operation is required.

technical data

Supply 12V DC 50mA from the DyNet network Control Inputs 1 x RS 485 DyNet serial port Front Cover Finishes Standard: Brushed Stainless Steel, White Glass, Black Glass. An extensive designer range of cover finishes is also available, see page 4. Button Colours Charcoal grey, white or silver. Compliance CE, C-Tick

LED Indicators Status indicator - Blue Button backlighting - White (Other colours available on request) Operating Environment 0-50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Materials Bezel, Key Carrier and Grid Plate Polycarbonate Standard Covers - see page 4. Weight Packed weight 0.2kg

alternate cover finishes The Philips Dynalite DR2P Revolution series user control panels include an extensive designer range of cover and button cap colour accessories. Available cover finishes include brushed stainless steel, white glass and black glass as standard and can encompass any finish imaginable; wood grain, processed stone, laminate, fabric as custom orders. To complement these finishes, button caps are available in silver, white and charcoal grey, providing a wide range of décor matching possibilities. A dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.

DR2P-GXX-X-C-BG-R-BW-X-C-Entry Black Borosilicate Glass, Charcoal Buttons

DR2P-LXX-S-AB-R-BO-C-Lounge2 Antique Bronze, Silver Buttons

DR2P-MXX-X-C-SS-R-BW-X-C-Bath1 Brushed Stainless Steel, Charcoal Buttons

DR2P-LXX-S-SG-R-BO-C-Lounge1 White Optically Clear Glass, Silver Buttons

DR2P-MXX-X-C-WE-R-BV-X-C-Bath3 White Powder Coated, Charcoal Buttons

DR2PA

Revolution Series User Control Panels functionality All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.

dimensions 5.4

20.6 13.6

43

84

117

74.6

28.3

70

Single Gang 1 Column

DR2PA

Revolution Series User Control Panels Single Gang Landscape 3 Column

snap-on finish accessories User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to, or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Button column assemblies and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any special tools or extra wiring.

Button column assemblies and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated.

DR2PA

Revolution Series User Control Panels panel ordering information Detailed below are the DR2P configuration option product codes. Use these codes to specify your requirements. Series

Description

IR Keycaps

DR2PA AsiaPac DR2PE European/UK

Button Colour

Description

X Not fitted I

W

White

C

Charcoal

S

Silver

Fitted**

Option Description X

No Dipswitches fitted

C

Custom Engraving

S

Standard Engraving#

X

No Engraving

DR2PA-MXX-X-C-WE-P-BW-X-C-Bath3 Panel Description – shown if Custom Engraving option taken – maximum 8 characters

Cover Finish Description SS

Brushed Stainless Steel

BG

Black Borosilicate Glass

Option Description

SG

White Optically Clear Starfire Glass

BW

PB

Polished Brass (Gold Plated Polished Stainless)

Blue Indicator LED & White Backlight – only for charcoal buttons

AB

Antique Bronze

BO

WE

White (Powder Coated Stainless)

Blue Indicator LED & Orange Backlight – all button colours

MS

Mirrored Stainless

R

2 x RJ12 DyNet Sockets

XX

No Cover

P

Pluggable Screw Terminal

A

B

C

D

E

F

G 1

1 On

On On/OFF

1

1 2

OFF OFF

OFF

2

2

3

OFF

OFF

2

3 OFF

H

I 1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4 OFF

OFF

J 1

2

OFF

K

L

M

1

1

1

2

2

2

3

3

3

4

4

4

5 OFF

DR2PA Data Sheet Rev G April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

R*

1

1

5

5

2

2

6

OFF

3

OFF

OFF

OFF

t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333 www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]

Q*

*

OLEDs come standard configuration as non-programmed. e.g. include applications for HVAC and AV control. Maximum one OLED per panel and always the right hand side column.

#

Note: If ‘Standard’ Engraving chosen then buttons will be engraved as shown above for single column panels. In case of 2 & 3 column panels then numbering will start at top most left hand button and continue to bottom most right hand numbered button.

** If IR receive switch cap fitted then button colour choice must be charcoal.

DR2PE

Revolution Series User Control Panels

The second generation DR2PE series user control panels incorporate a revolutionary clip-on cover fastening system which provides the ultimate in aesthetic design flexibility. DR2PE series panels are available in a range of configurations including single column, which provides arrangements of one to eight buttons and double or triple column designs for up to twenty four buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Button backlighting is also provided to illuminate engraved text, improving night time panel location and operation. Optional Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities are available, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remote control operation is required.

technical data

Supply 12V DC 50mA from the DyNet network Control Inputs 1 x RS 485 DyNet serial port Front Cover Finishes Standard: Brushed Stainless Steel, White Glass, Black Glass. An extensive designer range of cover finishes is also available, see page 4.

LED Indicators Status indicator - Blue Button backlighting - White or Orange for Charcoal Grey buttons - Orange only for White or Silver buttons Operating Environment 0-50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing

Button Colours Charcoal grey, white or silver.

Materials Bezel, Key Carrier and Grid Plate Polycarbonate Standard Covers - see page 4

Compliance CE, C-Tick

Weight Packed weight 0.2kg

alternate cover finishes The Philips Dynalite DR2PE Revolution series user control panels include an extensive designer range of cover and button cap colour accessories. Available cover finishes include brushed stainless steel, white glass and black glass as standard and can encompass any finish imaginable; wood grain, processed stone, laminate, fabric as custom orders. To complement these finishes, button caps are available in silver, white and charcoal grey, providing a wide range of décor matching possibilities. A dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.

DR2PE-MXX-X-C-SS-P-BW-X-C-Bath1 Stainless Steel, Charcoal Buttons

DR2PE-GXX-X-C-BG-P-BW-X-C-Entry Black Borosilicate Glass, Charcoal Buttons

DR2PE-LXX-X-S-SG-P-BO-X-C-Lounge1 White Optically Clear Glass, Silver Buttons

DR2PE-JXX-X-C-MS-P-BW-X-C-Study2 Mirrored Stainless, White Buttons

DR2PE-LXX-X-S-AB-P-BO-X-C-Lounge2 Antique Bronze, Silver Buttons

DR2PE-MXX-X-C-WE-P-BW-X-C-Bath3 White Powder Coated, Charcoal Buttons

DR2PE-LXX-X-C-PB-P-BW-X-C-Level4 Polishes Brass, White Buttons

DR2PE

Revolution Series User Control Panels functionality All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.

dimensions Single Gang 1 Column

28.3 88.4

60.3

20.7 5.4

R30

50

88.4

12.5

50

DR2PE

Revolution Series User Control Panels Double Gang 3 Column

snap-on finish accessories User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Button column assemblies and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any special tools or extra wiring.

Button column assemblies and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated.

DR2PE

Revolution Series User Control Panels panel ordering information Detailed below are the DR2P configuration option product codes. Use these codes to specify your requirements. Series

Description

IR Keycaps

DR2PA AsiaPac DR2PE European/UK

Button Colour

Description

X Not fitted I

W

White

C

Charcoal

S

Silver

Fitted**

Option Description X

No Dipswitches fitted

C

Custom Engraving

S

Standard Engraving#

X

No Engraving

DR2PE-MXX-X-C-WE-P-BW-X-C-Bath3 Panel Description – shown if Custom Engraving option taken – maximum 8 characters

Cover Finish Description SS

Brushed Stainless Steel

BG

Black Borosilicate Glass

Option Description

SG

White Optically Clear Starfire Glass

BW

PB

Polished Brass (Gold Plated Polished Stainless)

Blue Indicator LED & White Backlight – only for charcoal buttons

AB

Antique Bronze

BO

WE

White (Powder Coated Stainless)

Blue Indicator LED & Orange Backlight – all button colours

MS

Mirrored Stainless

R

2 x RJ12 DyNet Sockets

XX

No Cover

P

Pluggable Screw Terminal

A

B

C

D

E

F

G 1

1 On

On On/OFF

1

1 2

OFF OFF

OFF

2

2

3

OFF

OFF

2

3 OFF

H

I 1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4 OFF

OFF

J 1

2

OFF

K

L

M

1

1

1

2

2

2

3

3

3

4

4

4

5 OFF

DR2PE Data Sheet Rev J April 2011

Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

R*

1

1

5

5

2

2

6

OFF

3

OFF

OFF

OFF


Q*

*

OLEDs come standard configuration as non-programmed. e.g. include applications for HVAC and AV control. Maximum one OLED per panel and always the right hand side column.

#

Note: If ‘Standard’ Engraving chosen then buttons will be engraved as shown above for single column panels. In case of 2 & 3 column panels then numbering will start at top most left hand button and continue to bottom most right hand numbered button.

** If IR receive switch cap fitted then button colour choice must be charcoal.

DPN

Classic Series User Control Panels

Philips Dynalite DPN series user control panels are a popular choice for commercial and residential applications, providing integrated automation solutions. These robust panels are supplied as standard in a brushed stainless steel finish, with square button caps in silver, black bezel and black engraving. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Custom design, finish and capability options further enhance the DPN series, offering superior choice and functionality.

technical data

Supply 12V DC 20mA from the DyNet network Front Cover Finishes Brushed Stainless Steel (standard), Gold Plated Stainless Steel, Mirrored Stainless Steel, Coated Solid Brass plated, Powdercoated colours and other metal finishes available upon request. Button Colours Silver (standard), Charcoal Grey

Operating Climate 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non-condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Materials Plate - Stainless Steel or Solid Brass Button Cap - Metallized ABS plastic Weight Packed weight 0.15kg

LED Indicators Blue (standard), Green or Red. Other colours available on request.

custom panels The Philips Dynalite DPN user control panels are available ex-stock in 13 standard layouts (see overleaf). Occasionally, the specific requirements of a project call for a panel not found within the standard range. Philips Dynalite DPN custom panels can be easily designed using any of the following components. Consult your Philips Dynalite dealer for advice. Keyswitch:

Provides dry contact inputs to the control panel micro-processor board. Commonly used to lock out the functionality of a panel so that only authorised users can access the panel or a particular function. They are generally used for partition control, panic switches or panel enable/disable.

Mechanical Fader: Faders are used to control the level of an individual channel or as a ‘master’ fader to control an entire room or area. The position of the fader gives a visual indication of the light level. Preset scenes are programmed by adjusting light levels using the faders, then pressing and holding the corresponding scene button for several seconds. Button Fader:

Provides individual channel level control, combined with the flexibility to allow ‘join’ of fader panels.

Network Socket:

An RJ12 socket that facilitates connection of a computer to the DyNet network.

Engraving:

Panel engraving is used to clarify the functionality of a panel using words or diagrams. Engraving is available in black or white lettering, either on button caps or the panel fascia. Each button cap can accommodate up to seven characters.

Mirrored Stainless Steel

Gold Plated Stainless Steel

Coated Solid Brass

Dpn

Classic Series User Control Panels functionality All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.

dimensions

16.1

48.4

84

1.6

69.1

115

72

33.6 30.3

DPn

Classic Series User Control Panels standard panel configurations User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.

ON/OFF

ON

OFF

1 2 3 OFF

1 2 3 4

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

OFF

1

OFF

2 3 4

PROGRAM

Panel DPN308 Function DyNet Network Socket Engraving Button: None Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 72mm Wallbox 1 gang

Panel DPN982D Function Programming, Keyswitch Engraving Buttons: 1-4, Up, Down, Off, Program. Plate: Panel Enable/Disable Dimensions H 115mm x W 118mm Wallbox 2 gang

Panel DPN914 Function On/Off Toggle Engraving Button: On/Off Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 72mm Wallbox 1 gang

Panel DPN981DN Function Preset, Keyswitch, Network Socket Engraving Buttons: 1-7, Off Plate: Panel Enable/Disable Dimensions H 115mm x W 118mm Wallbox 2 gang

Panel DPN921 Function On, Off Engraving Buttons: On, Off Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 72mm Wallbox 1 gang

Panel DPN9103 Function Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp Down Engraving Buttons: 1-7, Off, Up, Down Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 118mm Wallbox 2 gang

Panel DPN941 Function Preset Engraving Buttons: 1-3, Off Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 72mm Wallbox 1 gang


Panel DPN963 Function Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp Down Engraving Buttons: 1-3, Off, Up, Down. Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 72mm Wallbox 1 gang

Panel DPN9122 Function Programming Engraving Buttons: 1-8, Off, Up, Down, Program. Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 118mm Wallbox 2 gang



Panel DPN982 Function Programming Engraving Buttons: 1-4, Off, Up, Down, Program. Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 72mm Wallbox 1 gang

1

ENABLE

OFF

DISABLE

2 PANEL

3 4

PROGRAM

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

OFF

ENABLE

DISABLE PANEL

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

OFF

1

5

9

2

6

10

3

7

11

4

8

OFF

1

5

OFF

2

6

3

7

4

OFF

PROGRAM

1

5

9

13

2

6

10

14

3

7

11

15

4

8

12

OFF

DPn

Classic Series User Control Panels panel ordering information In addition to the standard layout codes provided on page 3, the following non-stock items may be ordered using the corresponding catalogue numbers.. DPN926 DPN908J DPN908J3 DPN941F1 DPN941D DPN941N DPN941J DPN941J3 DPN946 DPN946D

2 Button 2 Room Join Panel 0 Button Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch 0 Button Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch 4 Button Preset Panel with Single Fader 4 Button Preset Panel with Panel Enable Keyswitch 4 Button Preset Panel with DyNet Socket 4 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch 4 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel with Disable Keyswitch

DPN951F4 DPN951F6 DPN951F8 DPN951F12 DPN981D DPN981J DPN981J3 DPN981N DPN982J DPN982J3

5 Button Preset 4 Fader Panel 5 Button Preset 6 Fader Panel 5 Button Preset 8 Fader Panel 5 Button Preset 12 Fader Panel 8 Button Preset with Panel Enable Keyswitch 8 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch 8 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch 8 Button Preset Panel with DyNet Socket 8 Button Program Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch 8 Button Program Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch

stock engraved individual button caps Engraving Detail None (Blank) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ON OFF ON/OFF MANUAL DAY NIGHT SECURITY CLEAN PROGRAM

Silver with LED

Charcoal Grey with LED

Silver without LED

Charcoal Grey without LED

900-011 270-046 270-053 270-054 270-055 270-056 270-057 270-058 270-059 270-060 270-047 270-048 270-049 270-050 270-051 270-052 270-075 270-067 270-072 270-071 270-073 270-068 270-066 270-070 270-074 270-065 -

900-009 270-026 270-030 270-031 270-032 270-033 270-034 270-035 270-036 270-037 270-027 270-044 270-038 270-042 270-041 270-039 -

900-005 270-023 270-019 270-021 270-022

900-003 270-017 270-013 270-015 270-016

custom engraved individual button caps Engraving details must accompany order - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice. Style with LED window without LED window

Silver 270-089 270-087

Charcoal Grey 270-088 270-086

alternate finishes DPN***-MS DPN***-GS DPN***-BS DPN***-PC

Mirrored Stainless Steel Finish Gold Plated Stainless Steel Finish Coated Solid Brass Finish Custom Powdercoat Finish - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice

For further information contact:


DPN Data Sheet Rev E April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DPNE


Philips Dynalite DPNE series user control panels are a popular choice for commercial and residential applications, providing integrated automation solutions. These robust panels are supplied as standard in a brushed stainless steel finish, with square button caps in silver, black surround and black engraving. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Custom design, finish and capability options further enhance the DPNE series, offering superior choice and functionality.

technical data




custom panels The Philips Dynalite DPNE user control panels are available ex-stock in 13 standard layouts (see overleaf). Occasionally, the specific requirements of a project call for a panel not found within the standard range. Philips Dynalite DPNE custom panels can be easily designed using any of the following components. Consult your Philips Dynalite dealer for advice. Keyswitch:




Network Socket:


Engraving:




Antique Brass

DpnE


dimensions

88

88

1.60

16.05

69.10

33.60 30.25

60.33 48.42

DPnE

Classic Series User Control Panels standard panel configurations User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.

ON/OFF

ON

OFF

1 2 3 OFF

Panel DPNE982D Function Programming, Keyswitch Engraving Buttons: 1-4, Up, Down, Off, Program Plate: Panel Enable/Disable Dimensions H 86mm x W 146mm Wallbox 2 gang

Panel DPNE914 Function On/Off Toggle Engraving Button: On/Off Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 1 gang

Panel DPNE981DN Function Preset, Keyswitch, Network Socket Engraving Buttons: 1-7, Off Plate: Panel Enable/Disable Dimensions H 86mm x W 146mm Wallbox 2 gang

Panel DPNE921 Function On, Off Engraving Buttons: On, Off Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 1 gang

Panel DPNE9103 Function Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp Down Engraving Buttons: 1-7, Off, Up, Down Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 146mm Wallbox 2 gang

Panel DPNE941 Function Preset Engraving Buttons: 1-3, Off Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 1 gang


1

OFF ENABLE

2 DISABLE

3 PANEL

4

PROGRAM

2 3 OFF

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

OFF

1

OFF

2 3 PROGRAM

Panel DPNE981 Function Preset Engraving Buttons: 1-7, Off Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 1 gang Panel DPNE982 Function Programming Engraving Buttons: 1-4, Off, Up, Down, Program Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 1 gang


ENABLE

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

OFF

Panel DPNE9122 Panel DPNE963 Function Programming Function Preset, Ramp Up, Engraving Buttons: 1-8, Off, Up, Down, Ramp Down Program Engraving Buttons: 1-3, Off, Up, Down Plate: Blank Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 146mm Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 2 gang Wallbox 1 gang

1

4

Panel DPNE308N Function DyNet Network Socket Engraving Button: None Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 1 gang

DISABLE

PANEL

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

1

5

9

2

6

10

3

7

11

4

8

OFF

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

OFF

PROGRAM

1

5

9

13

2

6

10

14

3

7

11

15

4

8

9

OFF

DPnE

Classic Series User Control Panels panel ordering information In addition to the standard layout codes provided on page 3, the following non-stock items may be ordered using the corresponding catalogue numbers. DPNE926 DPNE908J DPNE908J3 DPNE941F1 DPNE941D DPNE941N DPNE941J DPNE941J3 DPNE946 DPNE946D


DPNE951F4 DPNE951F6 DPNE951F8 DPNE951F12 DPNE981D DPNE981J DPNE981J3 DPNE981N DPNE982J DPNE982J3



Silver with LED


Silver without LED


900-011 270-046 270-053 270-054 270-055 270-056 270-057 270-058 270-059 270-060 270-047 270-048 270-049 270-050 270-051 270-052 270-075 270-067 270-072 270-071 270-073 270-068 270-066 270-070 270-074 270-065 -

900-009 270-026 270-030 270-031 270-032 270-033 270-034 270-035 270-036 270-037 270-027 270-044 270-038 270-042 270-041 270-039 -

900-005 270-023 270-019 270-021 270-022

900-003 270-017 270-013 270-015 270-016

custom engraved individual button caps Engraving details must accompany order - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice. Silver 270-089 270-087

Style with LED window without LED window


alternate finishes DPNE***-MS DPNE***-GS DPNE***-BS DPNE***-PC




DPNE Data Sheet Rev F April 2011


DPN-SF


Philips Dynalite DPN-SF series user control panels are a popular choice for commercial and residential applications, providing integrated automation solutions. These robust panels are supplied as standard in a brushed stainless steel finish, with square button caps in silver, black bezel and black engraving. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Custom design, finish and capability options further enhance the DPN series, offering superior choice and functionality.

technical data




custom panels The Philips Dynalite DPN-SF user control panels are available ex-stock in 13 standard layouts (see overleaf). Occasionally, the specific requirements of a project call for a panel not found within the standard range. Philips Dynalite DPN-SF custom panels can be easily designed using any of the following components. Consult your Philips Dynalite dealer for advice. Keyswitch:




Network Socket:


Engraving:




Coated Solid Brass

Dpn-SF


dimensions 33.60 28.50 14.30

48.01 16.80

83.65

3

65.41 78.90

115

72

DPn-SF

Classic Series User Control Panels standard panel configurations User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring. Panel DPN308N-SF Function DyNet Network Socket Engraving Button: None Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 72mm Wallbox 1 gang

Panel Function Engraving

ON/OFF

Dimensions Wallbox

Panel Function Engraving

ON

OFF

Dimensions Wallbox Panel Function Engraving

1 2 3 OFF

Dimensions Wallbox Panel Function

1 2

Engraving

3 4

Dimensions Wallbox

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

OFF

1

OFF

2 3 4

PROGRAM

Panel DPN982D-SF Function Programming, Keyswitch Engraving Buttons: 1-4, Up, Down, Off, Program Plate: Panel Enable/Disable Dimensions H 115mm x W 118mm Wallbox 2 gang

DPN914-SF On/Off Toggle Button: On/Off Plate: Blank H 115mm x W 72mm 1 gang

Panel DPN981DN-SF Function Preset, Keyswitch, Network Socket Engraving Buttons: 1-7, Off Plate: Panel Enable/Disable Dimensions H 115mm x W 118mm Wallbox 2 gang

DPN921-SF On, Off Buttons: On, Off Plate: Blank H 115mm x W 72mm 1 gang

Panel DPN9103-SF Function Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp Down Engraving Buttons: 1-7, Off, Up, Down Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 118mm Wallbox 2 gang

DPN941-SF Preset Buttons: 1-3, Off Plate: Blank H 115mm x W 72mm 1 gang

Panel DPN9121-SF Function Preset Engraving Buttons: 1-11, Off Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 118mm Wallbox 2 gang

1

Panel DPN982-SF Function Programming Engraving Buttons: 1-4, Off, Up, Down, Program Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 72mm Wallbox 1 gang


DISABLE

2 PANEL

3 4

PROGRAM

1

5

2

6

ENABLE

DISABLE

PANEL

3

7

4

OFF

Panel DPN9122-SF DPN963-SF Function Programming Preset, Ramp Up, Engraving Buttons: 1-8, Off, Up, Down, Ramp Down Program Buttons: 1-3, Off, Up, Down Plate: Blank Plate: Blank Dimensions H 115mm x W 118mm H 115mm x W 72mm Wallbox 2 gang 1 gang


ENABLE

OFF

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

OFF

1

5

9

2

6

10

3

7

11

4

8

OFF

1

5

OFF

2

6

3

7

4

OFF

PROGRAM

1

5

9

13

2

6

10

14

3

7

11

15

4

8

12

OFF

DPn-SF

Classic Series User Control Panels panel ordering information In addition to the standard layout codes provided on page 3, the following non-stock items may be ordered using the corresponding catalogue numbers.. DPN926-SF DPN908J-SF DPN908J3-SF DPN941F1-SF DPN941D-SF DPN941N-SF DPN941J-SF DPN941J3-SF DPN946-SF DPN946D-SF


DPN951F4-SF DPN951F6-SF DPN951F8-SF DPN951F12-SF DPN981D-SF DPN981J-SF DPN981J3-SF DPN981N-SF DPN982J-SF DPN982J3-SF



Silver with LED


Silver without LED


900-011 270-046 270-053 270-054 270-055 270-056 270-057 270-058 270-059 270-060 270-047 270-048 270-049 270-050 270-051 270-052 270-075 270-067 270-072 270-071 270-073 270-068 270-066 270-070 270-074 270-065 -

900-009 270-026 270-030 270-031 270-032 270-033 270-034 270-035 270-036 270-037 270-027 270-044 270-038 270-042 270-041 270-039 -

900-005 270-023 270-019 270-021 270-022

900-003 270-017 270-013 270-015 270-016

custom engraved individual button caps Engraving details must accompany order - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice. Style with LED window without LED window

Silver 270-089 270-087


alternate finishes DPN***-MS DPN***-GS DPN***-BS DPN***-PC




DPN-SF Data Sheet Rev D April 2011


DPNE-SF


Philips Dynalite DPNE-SF series user control panels are a popular choice for commercial and residential applications, providing integrated automation solutions. These robust panels are supplied as standard in a brushed stainless steel finish, with square button caps in silver, black surround and black engraving. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Custom design, finish and capability options further enhance the DPNE-SF series, offering superior choice and functionality.

technical data




custom panels The Philips Dynalite DPNE-SF user control panels are available ex-stock in 13 standard layouts (see overleaf). Occasionally, the specific requirements of a project call for a panel not found within the standard range. Philips Dynalite DPNE-SF custom panels can be easily designed using any of the following components. Consult your Philips Dynalite dealer for advice. Keyswitch:




Network Socket:


Engraving:




Antique Brass

DpnE-SF


dimensions 33.60 28.50 3.40

59.60 48.01

65.41

88

16.80

88

14.30

DPnE-SF

Classic Series User Control Panels standard panel configurations User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to, or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.

ON/OFF

ON

OFF

1 2 3 OFF

Panel DPNE982D-SF Function Programming, Keyswitch Engraving Buttons: 1-4, Up, Down, Off, Program Plate: Panel Enable/Disable Dimensions H 86mm x W 146mm Wallbox 2 gang

Panel DPNE914-SF Function On/Off Toggle Engraving Button: On/Off Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 1 gang

Panel DPNE981DN-SF Function Preset, Keyswitch, Network Socket Engraving Buttons: 1-7, Off Plate: Panel Enable/Disable Dimensions H 86mm x W 146mm Wallbox 2 gang

Panel DPNE921-SF Function On, Off Engraving Buttons: On, Off Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 1 gang

Panel DPNE9103-SF Function Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp Down Engraving Buttons: 1-7, Off, Up, Down Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 146mm Wallbox 2 gang

Panel DPNE941-SF Function Preset Engraving Buttons: 1-3, Off Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 1 gang


1

OFF ENABLE

2 DISABLE

3 PANEL

4

PROGRAM

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

OFF

Panel DPNE9122-SF Panel DPNE963-SF Function Programming Function Preset, Ramp Up, Engraving Buttons: 1-8, Off, Up, Down, Ramp Down Program Engraving Buttons: 1-3, Off, Up, Down Plate: Blank Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 146mm Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 2 gang Wallbox 1 gang

1 2 3 OFF

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

OFF

1

OFF

2 3 4

Panel DPNE308-SF Function DyNet Network Socket Engraving Button: None Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 1 gang

PROGRAM

Panel DPNE981-SF Function Preset Engraving Buttons: 1-7, Off Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 1 gang Panel DPNE982-SF Function Programming Engraving Buttons: 1-4, Off, Up, Down, Program Plate: Blank Dimensions H 86mm x W 86mm Wallbox 1 gang


ENABLE

DISABLE

PANEL

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

1

5

9

2

6

10

3

7

11

4

8

OFF

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

OFF

PROGRAM

1

5

9

13

2

6

10

14

3

7

11

15

4

8

9

OFF

DPnE-SF

Classic Series User Control Panels panel ordering information In addition to the standard layout codes provided on page 3, the following non-stock items may be ordered using the corresponding catalogue numbers. DPNE926-SF DPNE908J-SF DPNE908J3-SF DPNE941F1-SF DPNE941D-SF DPNE941N-SF DPNE941J-SF DPNE941J3-SF DPNEF946-SF DPNE946D-SF


DPNE951F4-SF DPNE951F6-SF DPNE951F8-SF DPNE951F12-SF DPNE981D-SF DPNE981J-SF DPNE981J3-SF DPNE981N-SF DPNE982J-SF DPNE982J3-SF



Silver with LED


Silver without LED


900-011 270-046 270-053 270-054 270-055 270-056 270-057 270-058 270-059 270-060 270-047 270-048 270-049 270-050 270-051 270-052 270-075 270-067 270-072 270-071 270-073 270-068 270-066 270-070 270-074 270-065 -

900-009 270-026 270-030 270-031 270-032 270-033 270-034 270-035 270-036 270-037 270-027 270-044 270-038 270-042 270-041 270-039 -

900-005 270-023 270-019 270-021 270-022

900-003 270-017 270-013 270-015 270-016

custom engraved individual button caps Engraving details must accompany order - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice. Silver 270-089 270-087

Style with LED window without LED window


alternate finishes DPNE-SF***-MS DPNE-SF***-GS DPNE-SF***-BS DPNE-SF***-PC




DPNE-SF Data Sheet Rev D April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DLP

Standard Series User Control Panels

Philips Dynalite DLP series user control panels are an aesthetically pleasing, cost-effective method of providing integrated automation in commercial buildings and homes. They are available in two configurations; a single column, which provides for button configurations of one to five buttons and a dual column design for up to ten buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of switch function. The Philips Dynalite DLP series user control panels incorporate a miniature DyNet control network socket, which is accessed by removing the snap-on panel cover, enabling system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network. Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities have been integrated, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remotes are required.

technical data

Supply 12V DC 20-35mA from the DyNet network Control Inputs 1 x RS 485 DyNet serial port

Operating Climate 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick

Front Cover Finishes Electric White Button Colours Electric white (standard) or charcoal grey. Other colours available upon request LED Indicators Blue

Materials Grid Plate & Rear Cover - ABS Plastic Cover - ABS Switch Membrane - Silicone Weight Packed weight 0.15kg

standard panel configurations (others available upon request)

1 button

2 buttons

5 buttons

6 buttons

7 buttons

10 buttons

available finishes The Philips Dynalite DLP user control panels are supplied in electric white. To complement this finish, button caps and bezels are available in white and charcoal grey and a dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.

DLP

Standard Series User Control Panels functionality All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.

dimensions 5.9 19.8

45

83.8 99.5

34.4

54

115.9

71.9

14.6 12.3

DLP

Standard Series User Control Panels mechanics User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to, or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.

button caps The button shape offers a generous area for text or symbols, ensuring that the function of each button is clearly discernable from normal viewing distances. Over nineteen standard engraved button caps are available ex-stock. Contact your local Philips Dynalite dealer for details on custom engraving.

White (WE)

Charcoal (CH)

IR Receive (IR)

IR receive

network access

The Philips Dynalite DLP user control panels incorporate Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities as standard. When IR receive is required, an LSP-SW-IR switch cap must be fitted in button position 5 for single column panels and position 10 for dual column panels.

The DyNet control network is easily accessed by removing the snap-on cover and inserting the LSP-PRO network connector into the miniature panel socket, as illustrated below. This enables system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network.

DLP

Standard Series User Control Panels panel ordering information Detailed below are catalogue numbers for the standard panel configurations, which are supplied complete with blue LED status indicators, white covers, blank white buttons and white bezels. Grid Plate

Configurable Panel

Spare Cover

1 Button

DLP910

LSP-COV-01-WE

2 Button

DLP920

LSP-COV-02-WE

5 Button

DLP950

LSP-COV-05-WE

6 Button

DLP960

LSP-COV-06-WE

7 Button

DLP970

LSP-COV-07-WE

10 Button

DLP9100

LSP-COV-10-WE

switchcap ordering information Blank Caps & Bezels

Part Number

Cap - White

LSP-SW-WE

Bezel - White

LSP-BZ-WE

Cap - Charcoal

LSP-SW-CH

Bezel - Charcoal

LSP-BZ-CH

Cap to suit IR Receive

Engraved Caps Button Cap Engraving Detail

White Cap

Charcoal Grey Cap

1

LSP-SW-WE-1

LSP-SW-CH-1

2

LSP-SW-WE-2

LSP-SW-CH-2

3

LSP-SW-WE-3

LSP-SW-CH-3

4

LSP-SW-WE-4

LSP-SW-CH-4

5

LSP-SW-WE-5

LSP-SW-CH-5

6

LSP-SW-WE-6

LSP-SW-CH-6

7

LSP-SW-WE-7

LSP-SW-CH-7

8

LSP-SW-WE-8

LSP-SW-CH-8

LSP-SW-IR

9

LSP-SW-WE-9

LSP-SW-CH-9

10

LSP-SW-WE-10

LSP-SW-CH-10

LSP-SW-WE-UP

LSP-SW-CH-Up

LSP-SW-WE-DOWN

LSP-SW-CH-DOWN

PROGRAM

LSP-SW-WE-PROGRAM

LSP-SW-CH-PROGRAM

ON

LSP-SW-WE-ON

LSP-SW-CH-ON

OFF

LSP-SW-WE-OFF

LSP-SW-CH-OFF

ON/OFF

LSP-SW-WE-ON/OFF

LSP-SW-CH-ON/OFF

HIGH

LSP-SW-WE-HIGH

LSP-SW-CH-HIGH

MED

LSP-SW-WE-MED

LSP-SW-CH-MED

LOW

LSP-SW-WE-LOW

LSP-SW-CH-LOW



DLP Data Sheet Rev N April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DLPE

Standard Series User Control Panels The Philips Dynalite DLPE series user control panels are an aesthetically pleasing, cost-effective method of providing integrated automation in homes and commercial buildings. They are available in two configurations; a single column, which provides for button configurations of one to five buttons and a dual column design for up to ten buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. The Philips Dynalite DLPE series user control panels incorporate a miniature DyNet control network socket, which is accessed by removing the snap-on panel cover, enabling system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network. Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities have been integrated, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remotes are required.

technical data


Operating Environment 0-50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick

Front Cover Finishes Brushed Stainless Steel (standard) or Gunmetal. Other material and colour finishes available upon request. Button Colours Charcoal grey (standard) or electric white. Other colours available upon request.

Materials Grid Plate & Rear Cover - ABS Switch Membrane - Silicone Metallic Covers - Anodised Aluminium, Stainless Steel Weight Packed weight 0.15kg

LED Indicators Blue (standard), Red or Green. Other colours available on request.


1 button

2 buttons

5 buttons

6 buttons

7 buttons

10 buttons

available finishes The Philips Dynalite DLPE series user control panels include an extensive designer range of cover, button cap and bezel colour accessories. In addition to the standard Brushed Stainless Steel, covers are available in Gunmetal or other material and colour finishes (on request). To complement these finishes, button caps and bezels are available in white and charcoal grey, providing a wide range of décor matching capabilities. A dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.

DLPE


dimensions

73.3 60.3 45

73.1

87.4

87.4

14.5 11.7

19.9 6.1

54

34.4

DLPE


button caps The button shape offers a generous area for text or symbols, ensuring that the function of each button is clearly discernable from normal viewing distances. Over 19 standard engraved button caps are available ex-stock. Contact your local Philips Dynalite dealer for details on custom engraving.

Charcoal (CH)

White (WE)

IR Receive (IR)

IR receive

network access

The Philips Dynalite DLPE user control panels incorporate Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities as standard. When IR receive is required, an LSP-SW-IR switch cap must be fitted in button position 5 for single column panels and position 10 for dual column panels.


DLPE

Standard Series User Control Panels panel ordering information Detailed below are catalogue numbers for the standard panel configurations, which are supplied complete with blue LED status indicators, brushed stainless steel covers, charcoal grey buttons and charcoal grey bezels. Grid Plate

Configurable Panel

1 Button

DLPE910

2 Button

DLPE920

5 Button

DLPE950

6 Button

DLPE960

7 Button

DLPE970

10 Button

DLPE9100

snap-on finish accessories ordering information DLPE Metallic Covers

Engraved caps

Grid

Stainless Steel

Button Cap Engraving Detail

White Cap

Charcoal Grey Cap

1 Button

DLPE-01SS

1

LSP-SW-WE-1

LSP-SW-CH-1

2 Button

DLPE-02SS

2

LSP-SW-WE-2

LSP-SW-CH-2

5 Button

DLPE-05SS

3

LSP-SW-WE-3

LSP-SW-CH-3

6 Button

DLPE-06SS

4

LSP-SW-WE-4

LSP-SW-CH-4

7 Button

DLPE-07SS

5

LSP-SW-WE-5

LSP-SW-CH-5

10 Button

DLPE-010SS

6

LSP-SW-WE-6

LSP-SW-CH-6

Grid

Gun metal

7

LSP-SW-WE-7

LSP-SW-CH-7

8

LSP-SW-WE-8

LSP-SW-CH-8

1 Button

DLPE-01GL

9

LSP-SW-WE-9

LSP-SW-CH-9

2 Button

DLPE-02GL

10

LSP-SW-WE-10

LSP-SW-CH-10

5 Button

DLPE-05GL

LSP-SW-WE-UP

LSP-SW-CH-Up

6 Button

DLPE-06GL

LSP-SW-WE-DOWN

LSP-SW-CH-DOWN

7 Button

DLPE-07GL

PROGRAM

LSP-SW-WE-PROGRAM

LSP-SW-CH-PROGRAM

DLPE-010GL

ON

LSP-SW-WE-ON

LSP-SW-CH-ON

10 Button

Blank Caps & Bezels

Part Number

OFF

LSP-SW-WE-OFF

LSP-SW-CH-OFF

ON/OFF

LSP-SW-WE-ON/OFF

LSP-SW-CH-ON/OFF

HIGH

LSP-SW-WE-HIGH

LSP-SW-CH-HIGH

LSP-SW-WE-MED

LSP-SW-CH-MED

LSP-SW-WE-LOW

LSP-SW-CH-LOW

Cap - White

LSP-SW-WE

MED

Bezel - White

LSP-BZ-WE

LOW

Cap - Charcoal

LSP-SW-CH

Bezel - Charcoal

LSP-BZ-CH


LSP-SW-IR



DLPE Data Sheet Rev J April 2011


DL2P


Philips Dynalite DL2P series user control panels are an aesthetically pleasing, cost-effective method of providing integrated automation in commercial buildings and homes. They are available in two configurations; a single column, which provides for button configurations of one to five buttons and a dual column design for up to ten buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of switch function. The Philips Dynalite DL2P series user control panels incorporate a miniature DyNet control network socket, which is accessed by removing the snap-on panel cover, enabling system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network. Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities have been integrated, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remotes are required.

technical data


Operating Climate 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick

Front Cover Finishes Electric White Button Colours Electric white (standard) or charcoal grey. Other colours available upon request LED Indicators Blue

Materials Grid Plate & Rear Cover - ABS Plastic Cover - ABS Switch Membrane - Silicone Weight Packed weight 0.15kg


1 button

2 buttons

5 buttons

6 buttons

7 buttons

10 buttons

available finishes The Philips Dynalite DL2P user control panels are supplied in electric white. To complement this finish, button caps and bezels are available in white and charcoal grey and a dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.

DL2P


dimensions 34.5

93.7

48.6

83.8 99.5

27.8 13.9

116.2

73.7

6.7 4.8

DL2P


button caps The button shape offers a generous area for text or symbols, ensuring that the function of each button is clearly discernable from normal viewing distances. Over nineteen standard engraved button caps are available ex-stock. Contact your local Philips Dynalite dealer for details on custom engraving.

White (WE)

Charcoal (CH)

IR Receive (IR)

IR receive

network access

The Philips Dynalite DL2P user control panels incorporate Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities as standard. When IR receive is required, an LSP-SW-IR switch cap must be fitted in button position 5 for single column panels and position 10 for dual column panels.


DL2P


Configurable Panel

Spare Cover

1 Button

DL2P910

LSP-COV-01-WE

2 Button

DL2P920

LSP-COV-02-WE

5 Button

DL2P950

LSP-COV-05-WE

6 Button

DL2P960

LSP-COV-06-WE

7 Button

DL2P970

LSP-COV-07-WE

10 Button

DL2P9100

LSP-COV-10-WE

switchcap ordering information Blank Caps & Bezels

Part Number

Cap - White

LSP-SW-WE

Bezel - White

LSP-BZ-WE

Cap - Charcoal

LSP-SW-CH

Bezel - Charcoal

LSP-BZ-CH


Engraved Caps Button Cap Engraving Detail

White Cap

Charcoal Grey Cap

1

LSP-SW-WE-1

LSP-SW-CH-1

2

LSP-SW-WE-2

LSP-SW-CH-2

3

LSP-SW-WE-3

LSP-SW-CH-3

4

LSP-SW-WE-4

LSP-SW-CH-4

5

LSP-SW-WE-5

LSP-SW-CH-5

6

LSP-SW-WE-6

LSP-SW-CH-6

7

LSP-SW-WE-7

LSP-SW-CH-7

8

LSP-SW-WE-8

LSP-SW-CH-8

LSP-SW-IR

9

LSP-SW-WE-9

LSP-SW-CH-9

10

LSP-SW-WE-10

LSP-SW-CH-10

LSP-SW-WE-UP

LSP-SW-CH-Up

LSP-SW-WE-DOWN

LSP-SW-CH-DOWN

PROGRAM

LSP-SW-WE-PROGRAM

LSP-SW-CH-PROGRAM

ON

LSP-SW-WE-ON

LSP-SW-CH-ON

OFF

LSP-SW-WE-OFF

LSP-SW-CH-OFF

ON/OFF

LSP-SW-WE-ON/OFF

LSP-SW-CH-ON/OFF

HIGH

LSP-SW-WE-HIGH

LSP-SW-CH-HIGH

MED

LSP-SW-WE-MED

LSP-SW-CH-MED

LOW

LSP-SW-WE-LOW

LSP-SW-CH-LOW



DL2P Data Sheet Rev A April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DPWE


The Philips Dynalite DPWE series user control panels are an aesthetically pleasing, cost-effective method of providing integrated automation in homes and commercial buildings. They are available in two configurations; a single column, which provides for button configurations of one to five buttons and a dual column design for up to ten buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. The Philips Dynalite DPWE series user control panels incorporate a miniature DyNet control network socket, which is accessed by removing the snap-on panel cover, enabling system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network. Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities have been integrated, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remotes are required.

technical data

Supply 12V DC 20-35mA from the DyNet network Control Inputs 1 x RS 485 DyNet serial port Front Cover Finishes Standard: Brushed Stainless Steel, Polished Brass, Brushed Brass, Antique Bronze, White, Matt Black and Mirrored Stainless Steel. Optional: Satin Silver, Antique Brass, Antique Copper, Antique Silver, Polished Desert Brass, Desert Gold, Light Bronze, Creamy White. Other material and colour finishes available upon request. Button Colours Charcoal grey (standard) or electric white. Other colours available upon request.

LED Indicators Blue (standard), Red or Green. Other colours available on request. Operating Environment 0-50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Materials Grid Plate & Rear Cover - ABS Switch Membrane - Silicone Metallic Covers - Anodised Aluminium, Stainless Steel Weight Packed weight 0.15kg


1 button

2 buttons

5 buttons

6 buttons

7 buttons

10 buttons

available finishes The Philips Dynalite DPWE series user control panels include an extensive designer range of cover, button cap and bezel colour accessories. Cover finishes include Brushed Stainless Steel, Polished Brass, Brushed Brass, Antique Bronze, White, Matt Black, and Mirrored Stainless. To complement these finishes, button caps and bezels are available in white and charcoal grey, providing a wide range of décor matching capabilities. A dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.

DPWE


dimensions

63 60.30 53.90

63 68.88

86

86

12.40 8.10 5.70

34.40 26.30

DPWE


button caps The button shape offers a generous area for text or symbols, ensuring that the function of each button is clearly discernable from normal viewing distances. Over 19 standard engraved button caps are available ex-stock. Contact your local Philips Dynalite dealer for details on custom engraving.

Charcoal (CH)

White (WE)

IR Receive (IR)

IR receive

network access

9 Series Configurable user control panels incorporate Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities as standard. When IR receive is required an LSP-SW-IR switch cap must be fitted in button position 5 for single column panels and position 10 for dual column panels.


DPWE


Panel Options

Configurable Panel

1 Button

Charcoal Grey Buttons - CH Electric White Buttons - WE

DPWE950

2 Button

* When options are required, add desired option code suffix(es) to catalogue number eg. DPWE910-GL

5 Button 6 Button 7 Button

DPWE9100

10 Button

snap-on finish accessories ordering information For finish combinations, covers, bezels and buttons are supplied separately using the catalogue numbers detailed below.

1 Button

Brushed Stainless DPWE-01SS

Polished Brass DPWE-01PB

Brushed Brass DPWE-01BB

Antique Bronze DPWE-01AB

2 Button

DPWE-02SS

DPWE-02PB

DPWE-02BB

DPWE-02AB

5 Button

DPWE-05SS

DPWE-05PB

DPWE-05BB

6 Button

DPWE-06SS

DPWE-06PB

DPWE-06BB

7 Button 10 Button

DPWE-07SS

DPWE-07PB

DPWE-10SS

DPWE-10PB

Grid

White

Matt Black

DPWE-01WE

DPWE-01MB

Mirrored Stainless DPWE-01MS

DPWE-02WE

DPWE-02MB

DPWE-02MS

DPWE-05AB

DPWE-05WE

DPWE-05MB

DPWE-05MS

DPWE-06AB

DPWE-06WE

DPWE-06MB

DPWE-06MS

DPWE-07BB

DPWE-07AB

DPWE-07WE

DPWE-07MB

DPWE-07MS

DPWE-10BB

DPWE-10AB

DPWE-10WE

DPWE-10MB

DPWE-10MS

Cap Engraving Detail

White Cap

Charcoal Grey Cap

1

LSP-SW-WE-1

LSP-SW-CH-1

2

LSP-SW-WE-2

LSP-SW-CH-2

3

LSP-SW-WE-3

LSP-SW-CH-3

4

LSP-SW-WE-4

LSP-SW-CH-4

5

LSP-SW-WE-5

LSP-SW-CH-5

6

LSP-SW-WE-6

LSP-SW-CH-6

7

LSP-SW-WE-7

LSP-SW-CH-7

8

LSP-SW-WE-8

LSP-SW-CH-8

9

LSP-SW-WE-9

LSP-SW-CH-9

10

PROGRAM

LSP-SW-WE-10

LSP-SW-CH-10

LSP-SW-WE-UP

LSP-SW-CH-Up

LSP-SW-WE-DOWN

LSP-SW-CH-DOWN

LSP-SW-WE-PROGRAM

LSP-SW-CH-PROGRAM

ON

LSP-SW-WE-ON

LSP-SW-CH-ON

OFF

LSP-SW-WE-OFF

LSP-SW-CH-OFF

ON/OFF

LSP-SW-WE-ON/OFF

LSP-SW-CH-ON/OFF

HIGH

LSP-SW-WE-HIGH

LSP-SW-CH-HIGH

MED

LSP-SW-WE-MED

LSP-SW-CH-MED

LOW

LSP-SW-WE-LOW

LSP-SW-CH-LOW

Caps & Bezels

Part Number

Cap - White

LSP-SW-WE

Bezel - White

LSP-BZ-WE

Cap - Charcoal

LSP-SW-CH

Bezel - Charcoal

LSP-BZ-CH


LSP-SW-IR



DPWE Data Sheet Rev H April 2011


DTP100

Colour Touchscreen

The DTP100 is a feature rich colour LCD touchscreen that uses vivid graphics and sophisticated on-screen controls which allows the Systems Installer to create visually stunning and easy-to-use pages. Control of various equipment such as lighting, AV, security and HVAC can be easily integrated and controlled from the one location. Objects such as logos, buttons, faders, floor plans and diagnostic icons can be placed on pages and used to perform simple and complex conditional logic macros. Pages are created using Philips Dynalite’s touchscreen editor. JavaScript is fully supported. Incorporating an innovative clip-on fascia capability, the DTP100 fascia accommodates practically any flat architectural surface medium. That gives you the freedom to choose; stainless steel, stone, glass, laminate, wood, vinyl, ceramic; the options are limitless. Fascia material may be matched with Philips Dynalite’s DR2P Revolution series user control panels for perfect colour coordination. Full internet connectivity is supported. The DTP100 is powered from the DyNet network so does not require a mains voltage supply.

technical data

DTP100-BG black glass facia shown*

Supply 12V DC @ 400mA from the DyNet network

Internal Controls PC time clock with battery backup Programmable Logic Controller

Screen Viewable Area: 10.9cm (4.3”) diagonal (H 5.38cm x W 9.5cm) Resolution: 480x272 (16:9 screen ratio) Colour Depth: 16bit (65536) Contrast: 300:1 Luminance: 350 cd/m2 Screen Type: TFT LCD Viewing Angle: H 75º Vtop 75º Vbottom 55º Backlight: LED, Dimmable, min 40,000 hr subject to screen saver settings Touch Overlay: 4 Wire Resistive

Hardware CPU: Intel XScale PXA310 624MHz Non Volatile Memory: 512MB Volatile Memory: 128MB

User Page Objects Button Fader Text box Icon Image import Operating System & Software Windows CE 6.0 Internet Explorer 6 Windows Media Player 9 / MP3 support Audio On board speaker Line Out via 3.5mm stereo jack IO Ports 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x Mini USB Type B service socket (programming port) 1 x Mini USB Type B service socket (keyboard/mouse) 1 x RJ45 10/100BaseT ethernet port 1 x Reset Switch

Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Climate 0º to 45ºC ambient temperature 10% to 90% RH non condensing Construction Concealed fixings fascia Dimensions Exposed: H 88 mm x W 146mm x D 6mm Weight Packed weight: 0.9kg Ordering Information* Stainless Steel (standard): DTP100 Black Glass fascia (option): DTP100-BG White Glass fascia (option): DTP100-WG *Custom facia finishes also available - ask your Philips Dynalite representative.

Wall box Mounting options 700-279 Wallbox recess metal 700-389 Wallbox recess drywall 700-280 Wallbox surface mount

DTP100

Colour Touchscreen

dimensions



DTP100 Data Sheet Rev F April 2011


DTP170

Colour Touchscreen

The DTP170 is a feature rich colour LCD touchscreen that uses vivid graphics and sophisticated on-screen controls which allows the Systems Installer to create visually stunning and easy-to-use pages. Control of various equipment such as lighting, AV, security and HVAC can be easily integrated and controlled from the one location. Objects such as logos, buttons, faders, floor plans and diagnostic icons can be placed on pages and used to perform simple and complex conditional logic macros. Pages are created using Philips Dynalite’s touchscreen editor. JavaScript is fully supported. Incorporating an innovative clip-on fascia capability, the DTP170 fascia accommodates practically any flat architectural surface medium. That gives you the freedom to choose; stainless steel, stone, glass, laminate, wood, vinyl, ceramic; the options are limitless. Fascia material may be matched with Dynalite’s DR2P Revolution series user control panels for perfect colour coordination. Full Internet connectivity is supported. The DTP170 is powered from the DyNet network so does not require a mains voltage connection.

technical data

Supply 12V DC @ 0.6A from the DyNet network Screen Viewable Area: 178mm (7”) diagonal (W 152mm x H 91mm) Resolution: 800x480 (WVGA / 16:9 ratio) Colour Depth: 65,536 (16bit) Contrast: 300:1 Luminance: 280 cd/m2 Screen Type: TFT LCD View Angle: H 65º Vtop 60º Vbottom 50º Backlight: LED, Dimmable, 40,000hr life Touch Overlay: 4 Wire Resistive User Page Objects Button Fader Text box Icon Image import Operating System & Software Windows CE 6.0 Internet Explorer 6 Windows Media Player 9 / MP3 support Audio On board speaker Line Out via 3.5mm stereo jack IO Ports 1 x RS485 DyNet port - screw terminals 1 x RS485 DyNet port - RJ12 1 x 10/100BaseT Ethernet port RJ45 1 x USB Type Mini-B socket 1 x USB Type A socket 1 x Reset switch

Internal Controls PC time clock with battery backup Programmable Logic Controller Hardware Intel XScale PXA310 624MHz, 128MB SDRAM, 512MB FLASH Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 10% to 90% RH non condensing Construction Concealed fixings facia, metal body & wallbox (wallbox supplied separately) Dimensions Exposed: H 149mm x W 233mm x D 7mm Hidden, including wallbox: H 136mm x W 220mm x D 70mm Weight Packed weight: 1.9kg Ordering Information* Stainless Steel fascia, no wallbox: DTP170 Stainless Steel fascia, with wallbox: DTP170-WB Wallbox only: DTP170-WALLBOX *Custom fascia finishes also available

DTP170

Colour Touchscreen

dimensions (wall box fitted) Hole suitable for 6 gauge or M3.5 pan head screw

Ø25.20

Hole suitable for 6 gauge or M3.5 pan head screw

19.20 79

Ø22.30

149 94.27

149 94.27

36.25

77.15 70

29.10

150 50

220 208.40 100

136 131 121.90

136

220 165 95

dimensions (no wall box)

155.28 233

155.28 233



DTP170 Data Sheet Rev E April 2011


DTC602 & DTCE602 Timer clock The DTC602 is an astronomical 365 day timer clock with Sunrise/Sunset tracking, automatic Daylight Saving adjustment and powerful macro and conditional logic functions. The timer clock interfaces with other devices over the DyNet RS485 network to automate tasks and events. It may be used as an energy management controller or simply to select scenes at preset times of the day or week. The DTC602 is powerful enough to provide full automation of a large commercial project and can be programmed with events that automatically run at the specified time. A typical application entails automating lighting levels in a restaurant for breakfast, lunch, dinner, evening entertainment and cleaning. A manual button press can over-ride the preprogrammed events until the next timed event occurs. In energy management applications, the timer clock sets the operating mode of other devices, such as Philips Dynalite DUS704 sensors, to give priority to either IR, PIR or PE facilities, depending on the time of day or day of week. The DTC602 can be programmed and operated remotely via a PC or via the front panel LCD display and keypad, which incorporates a PIN password to prevent unauthorised adjustment. The DTC602 can be used to make programming changes to a Philips Dynalite system without the use of a computer. The LCD display will help guide the user step by step through the programming task. Information such as channel, area and preset scene names are automatically uploaded from the network to assist in programming. It can be used in conjunction with standard control panels to access preset scenes that are not commonly used or that require protection from accidental selection. The device is available in Aus/US (DTC) & UK/Euro (DTCE) mounting configurations.

technical data

Supply 12V DC at 50mA from the DyNet network Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port User Controls 1 x 122 x 32 pixel rear lit LCD display 1 x 12 button LCD transport keys 1 x 12 button numeric keypad

DTC602

Clock 365 day clock Battery back up Sunrise/Sunset tracking Automatic daylight saving adjustment 250 timed events 64 tasks Memory All data stored in 100 year life EEPROM Compliance CE, C-Tick

DTCE602

Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction 1.6mm stainless steel faceplate/body Dimensions DTC602: H 115mm x W 164mm x D 24mm DTCE602: H 86mm x W 146mm x D 24mm Weight Packed weight 0.2kg

DTC602 & DTCE602 Timer clock

16mm

mounting dimensions DTC602 24mm

72mm 36mm

92mm

36mm

20mm

4mm

16mm

24mm

84mm

115mm

19mm

164mm

134mm 15mm

15mm

mounting dimensions DTCE602 146mm

68mm 9mm

43mm

86mm

9mm

24mm

121mm 13mm

20mm

4mm

13mm

134mm 6mm

6mm



DTC602 & DTCE602 Data Sheet Rev E April 2011


DDTC001

Timer clock

The DDTC001 is a tamper-resistant DIN rail mounted embedded timer clock. All functions are programmed via a PC and there are no external controls available, preventing disruption to device operation. The DDTC001 features an astronomical 365 day timer clock with Sunrise/Sunset tracking, automatic Daylight Saving adjustment and powerful macro and conditional logic functions. The timer clock interfaces with other devices over the DyNet RS485 network to automate tasks and events and may be used as an energy management controller or simply to select scenes at preset times of the day or week. The DDTC001 is powerful enough to provide full automation of a large commercial project and can be programmed with events that automatically run at the specified time. A typical application entails automating lighting levels in a restaurant for breakfast, lunch, dinner, evening entertainment and cleaning. The timer clock forms part of a powerful energy management system when used in conjunction with other Philips Dynalite devices. For instance, when used to set the operating mode of the Philips Dynalite DUS704 universal sensors, the timer clock can give priority to Infra-red, PIR or PE capability, depending on the time of day or day of week, ensuring that energy is not used unnecessarily. The DDTC001 is programmed remotely via a PC and will operate autonomously even if the PC is disconnected.

technical data

Supply 12V DC at 20mA from the DyNet network Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port User Controls No user controls - all functions are programmed with a PC Clock 365 day clock Battery back up Sunrise/Sunset tracking Automatic daylight saving adjustment 250 timed events 8 tasks Memory All data stored in 100 year life EEPROM

Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction ABS DIN Rail enclosure (2 unit) Dimensions H 86mm x W 35mm x D 58mm Weight Packed weight 0.1kg

DDTC001

Timer clock

mounting dimensions

86mm

top view

side view

58mm

35mm

end view 61mm

29mm

49mm

46mm

to suit 35mm DIN rail



DDTC001 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011


DUS804C

Multifunction Sensor

The DUS804C is a low profile recessed flush mount 360º ceiling mount sensor that combines motion detection (PIR), Infra-red remote control reception (IR) and ambient light level detection (PE) in the one device. In applications such as office buildings, lecture theatres and homes, the DUS804C universal sensor can be utilised to detect motion and switch on the lights. When rooms are unoccupied, lights can be automatically dimmed or switched off to provide energy savings. The unit also incorporates a segmented click-up bezel surrounding the motion sensor element. This enables a portion of the sensing field to be readily masked to prevent nuisance detection from adjacent doorways or corridors. The same sensor provides IR control reception to enable full remote control over lights, audio-visual equipment and blinds. A range of hand-held Infra-red transmitters to complement DUS804 series universal sensors are available. In situations where it is critical to maintain precise lighting control for individual workspaces, such as an office workstation or even air traffic control centres, the DUS804C facilitates light compensation. The DUS804C can also be placed in an automatic“Daylight Harvesting” mode for energy savings.

technical data

Motion Detector DUS804C: Standard Sensitivity Maximum detection range: 5.0m Detection Area: 7.4m x 5.6m rectangular (at a height of 2.5m) Detection speed: 1.0m/s Detection object: 700mm x 250mm Detection zones: 64 LED activation indicator Sensor: Quad element pyro-electric

DUS804C-SM: Slight Motion Sensitivity Maximum detection range: 2.0m Detection Area: 5.0m circular (at a height of 2.0m) Detection speed: 0.5m/s Detection object: 200mm x 200mm Detection zones: 104 LED activation indicator Sensor: Quad element pyro-electric PE Cell Range <5 lux to >5000 lux (reflected) Automatic “Daylight Harvesting” mode Infra Red Remote Control Receiver Range up to 6m LED activation indicator Can be used with DTK500 series Infra red remotes or other learning IR remote controls

Terminals Standard: 5 way removable terminal strip, 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size -RJ Option: 2 x RJ12 network sockets Controls Walk test/IR received LED indicator Service Switch DyNet DC Load 20mA Configuration All functions remotely programmable Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 90% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Construction ABS plastic enclosure Dimensions 72mm diameter x D 26mm Weight Packed weight 0.116kg

-RJ version with network sockets

motion detection masking bezel

options

Control IO Serial Port – RS485 DyNet

Slight motion sensitivity - SM 2 x RJ12 Network sockets - RJ

DUS804C


lens pattern - DUS804C

lens pattern - DUS804C-SM

Mounting height 2.5M


mounting dimensions Ø 63 mm Ø 61 mm

Ø

26 mm

72 mm

11 mm



DUS804C Data Sheet Rev G April 2011


DUS804C-UP Multifunction Sensor

The DUS804C-UP is a 360º ceiling surface mounted sensor that combines Ultrasonic (UP) Passive Infra Red (PIR) motion detection, ambient light level detection (PE) and infra red remote control reception (IR) in the one device. In applications such as office buildings, lecture theatres, and homes, the DUS804C-UP universal sensor can be utilised to detect motion with in its scan area to trigger a programed action with the lighting. When the DUS804 has detected a room is unoccupied for a set time, lights can be automatically dimmed or switched off to provide energy savings. The same sensor provides IR control reception to enable full remote control over lights, audio-visual equipment and blinds. A range of hand held infra-red transmitters to complement series of universal sensors are available. In situations where it is critical to maintain precise lighting control for large workspaces such as open office floor plan, the DUS804C facilitates light compensation in an automatic“Daylight Harvesting” mode for energy savings.

technical data

Motion Detection PIR: Maximum detection range: 5.0m Detection area: 7.4m x 5.6m ellipse (at a height of 2.5m) Detection speed: 1.0m/s Detection object: 700mm x 500mm Detection zones: 64 LED activation indicator Adjustable Pulse Count & Sensitivity Sensor: Quad element pyro-electric R.F.I. Immunity: >15V/m @ 101000MHz Ultrasonic: Normal motion detection area: 8m x 16m (128m2 coverage) Slight motion detection area: 4m x 12m (48m2 coverage) Transducer pairs: 2 Operating frequency: 32KHz PE Cell Range <5 lux to >5000 lux (reflected) Automatic “Daylight Harvesting” mode

DUS804C-UP with surface mounting

Infra Red Remote Control Receiver Range >6m LED activation indicator Can be used with DTK500 series infra red remotes or other learning IR remote controls Control IO Serial Port – RS485 DyNet IR window used as network sign on

Terminals 5 way removable terminal strip, 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Controls Walk test/IR received LED indicator DyNet DC Load 80mA Configuration All functions remotely programmable Operating Environment 0º to 45ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Construction ABS plastic enclosure Dimensions 90mm diameter x Depth 26mm (exposed) Mounting Recessed spring clip or adjustable surface mounting ring. Sensor shipped with surface mounting ring Weight Packed weight 0.25kg

DUS804C-UP Multifunction Sensor

mounting dimensions

Ø 63 9 25 Ø 90 27

17

coverage



DUS804-UP Datasheet Rev E April 2011


DUS704

Universal Sensors

The DUS704 series sensors combine motion detection (PIR), Infra-red remote control reception (IR) and ambient light level detection (PE) in the one device. In applications such as homes, lecture theatres and office towers, DUS704 universal sensors can be utilised to detect motion and switch on the lights. When rooms are unoccupied, lights can be automatically dimmed or switched off to provide energy savings. The same sensor provides IR control reception to enable full remote control over lights, audio-visual equipment and blinds. A range of hand-held Infra-red transmitters to complement DUS704 series universal sensors are available. In situations where it is critical to maintain precise lighting control for individual workspaces, such as a flight control tower or office workstation, the DUS704 facilitates light compensation. The DUS704 can also be placed in an automatic “Daylight Harvesting” mode for energy savings.

technical data

DUS704C

Motion Detector DUS704C: 360º Ceiling Mount PIR Detector Range 9m x 6m ellipse (at a height of 2.4m) Mounting height: 2.1m to 4.0m, 2.4m optimum LED activation indicator Adjustable Pulse Count & Sensitivity Detection zones: 34 dual element zones Sensor: Dual element pyro-electric R.F.I. Immunity: >15V/m @ 10-1000MHz

DUS704W: Wide Angle Wall Mount PIR Detector Range 12m x 90º (standard lens) Mounting height: 1.1m to 3.1m LED activation indicator Adjustable Pulse Count & Sensitivity Detection zones: 20 dual element zones Sensor: Dual element pyro-electric R.F.I. Immunity: >15V/m @ 10-1000MHz Optional lens: 30m x 30º Long Range PE Cell Dynamic range <5 lux to >13000 lux Automatic “Daylight Harvesting” mode Can be used for light measurement Infra Red Remote Control Receiver Range >6m LED activation indicator Can be used with DTK500 series Infra-red remotes or other learning IR remote control

DUS704W

options

Long Range Lens -LR

Control IO Serial Port – RS485 DyNet Terminals 5 way terminal strip, 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size and RJ12 socket Controls Walk test/IR received LED indicator Tamper switch DyNet DC Load 20mA Configuration All functions remotely programmable Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Construction ABS plastic enclosure Dimensions DUS704C: 102mm diameter x D 30mm

DUS704W: H 85mm x W 66mm x D 45mm Weight Packed weight 0.116kg

DUS704

Universal Sensors

lens pattern - DUS704W wide angle


12M

12M

lens pattern - DUS704C 360º

lens pattern - DUS704W long range



DUS704 Data Sheet Rev G April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DTS900 & DTS900M

Temperature Sensors

The DTS900 measures ambient temperature and provides data to other devices on a DyNet network, such as relay controllers used to switch heating and cooling plants. High and low setpoints are configured using Envision commissioning software, or can be dynamically set via other Philips Dynalite devices, such as the DTK600 touchscreen. Conversely, the touchscreen can also be used to interrogate the DTS900 and to display the current temperature in real time. The DTS900 incorporates filtering and hysteresis to provide compensation for rapid temperature fluctuations and features an LED indicator which provides the status of the device. The DTS900 is also available with a user-adjustable temperature setpoint knob (DTS900M).

technical data

Supply 12V @20mA from the DyNet network


Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port

Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non-condensing

Measurement Range 0º to 50ºC, accuracy +/-1ºC Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller User Controls • LED indicator Blue = Cool Red = Heat DTS900

DTS900M

• Temperature set point knob (DTS900M only)

Construction ABS plastic wall mount case Dimensions H 71mm x W 71mm x D 26mm Weight Packed weight 110 grams

DTS900 & DTS900M

Temperature Sensors electrical diagram DTS900

mounting dimensions 71mm

SHIELD GND DyNet RS485

T

D+

µP

71mm

D+15V

electrical diagram DTS900M SHIELD GND DyNet RS485

T

Ø60mm

D+ D+15V

µP



DTS900 & DTS900M Data Sheet Rev E April 2011


26mm 3mm

Relay and Multi-use Controllers

As one of the most popular forms of lighting control, relay and multi-use devices can have the most impact to energy management and lighting control. Available in both DIN rail and wall box configuration, Philips Dynalite supports a vast range of relay controllers with a variety of circuit numbers and sizes to work individually or as part of a system, suiting any project requirement. Each device can store over 170 presets, allowing the recall of complex switching logic from simple network messages. As the required preset scenarios are stored within each relay device, the commissioning process and network messages are simplified.

DMRC210

Relay Controller

The DMRC210 is designed to allow intelligent, networked control of individual lighting fixtures. The compact design enables the unit to be mounted directly within the gear enclosure of many fixtures. Each relay controller incorporates two relay outputs which can be used to control mains supply to the fixture and to provide an intensity control when used with tapped ballasts. The relays are very robust and are fully rated for difficult lighting loads.

technical data

Supply 100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 20A

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 150mA (supply for approx. 7 panels)

Outputs 2 x switched output at 10A (inductive)

Preset Scenes 170

Switching Device Relay, Tungsten pilot contact, 16A inductive, 165A surge

Supply Terminals Line, Neutral 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port

Output Terminals Line1, Line2, Neutral 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 50˚C max Enclosure ABS plastic Dimensions L 185mm x W 44mm x D 38mm Weight Packed weight 0.19kg

load compatibility

All types of Switched loads

DMRC210

Relay Controller

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions N

Supply: 100-240V 1 Phase 20A

CH1

L N

CH2

45 mm

Ø

5

µP

5 mm

10 mm

240 mm 225 mm

D-

+ VE

D+

DyNet RS485

240 mm 38 mm

GND

Shield

211 mm

45 mm



DMRC210 Data Sheet Rev G April 2011


DDRC810-GL Relay Controller

The DDRC810-GL controllers are designed to operate any type of switched load. The DDRC810-GL incorporates common supply SPST output relays, suitable for ON/OFF control of all types of mains rated equipment. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed for installation within a switchboard or next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled. The devices can operate as stand-alone units or as part of an integrated system when connected to a DyNet network.

technical data

Supply 100-240V, 50/60Hz Single Phase at max. 20A


Outputs DDRC810-GL – 8 x switched SPST common supply outputs: resistive relay contact TV5 rated 16A 250V AC

Preset Scenes 170

Maximum Total Box Load 20A Box Load Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port/DMX 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input User Controls Service Over-ride switch Diagnostic LED Internal Controls Inbuilt Programmable Logic Controller

Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals C, NO, NC for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Diagnostic Functions Circuit run time tracking on each channel Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Enclosure Polycarbonate DIN-rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.82kg

load compatibility

options

Any switched load, up to 10A per channel

Manual Override - MO front panel override switches, ideal for contactor control applications. Includes: • ON/OFF/AUTO override switch for each channel • LED status indicator for each channel

DDRC810-gl

Relay Controller

electrical diagram - DDRC810

mounting dimensions

AUX

D-

+ VE

D+

GND

Shield

Supply: 100-240V 1 Phase 20A

DyNet RS485



DDRC810-GL Data Sheet Rev J April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDRC810dt-GL

Multi-use Relay Controller

The DDRC810DT-GL controller is designed to operate any type of switched load. The DDRC810DT-GL incorporates voltage free changeover SPDT type output relays, making the device ideal for controlling bi-directional motors, such as curtain motors. This device is DIN-rail mountable, designed for installation within a switchboard, or next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled. This device can operate as stand-alone units or as part of an integrated system when connected to a DyNet network.

technical data

Supply 100-240V, 50/60Hz Single Phase at max. 0.25 A Active SMPS power consumption estimate is max 8W


Outputs DDRC810DT-GL – 8 x switched SPDT voltage free changeover maximum ratings for each output: 10A 250V AC (resistive), 10A 30V DC (resistive)

Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

• Snubbers/spark killers not fitted, de rate for reactive loads. • Functional isolation only between switched outputs, do not mix SELV and non-SELV loads on the same DDRC810DT-GL.

Maximum Total Box Load 40A Box Load Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input User Controls Service Over-ride switch Diagnostic LED Internal Controls Inbuilt Programmable Logic Controller

Preset Scenes 170

Output Terminals C, NO, NC for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Diagnostic Functions Circuit run time tracking on each channel Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Enclosure Polycarbonate DIN-rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.82kg

load compatibility

options

Any switched load, up to 10A per channel

Manual Override - MO front panel override switches, ideal for contactor control applications. Includes: • ON/OFF/AUTO override switch for each channel • LED status indicator for each channel

DDRC810DT-gl

Multi-use Relay Controller

electrical diagram - DDRC810

mounting dimensions

C NO C H1 NC C NO

C H2

NC C NO

C H3

NC C NO C H4 NC C

A

NO

N

S upply: 100-240V 0.25A 1 P has e

NC

E

C

C H5

NO C H6 NC C NO NC

C H7

C NO C H8

AUX

D-

D+

+VE

G ND

S hield

µP

NC

DyNet R S 485



DDRC810DT-GL Data Sheet Rev J April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDRC420FR

Relay Controller

The DDRC420FR is designed to control any type of switched load. The power circuit is of a “feed through” design and is electrically equivalent to a 4 pole contactor, with the additional advantage of each pole being separately controllable via the DyNet network. The DDRC420FR is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers, feeding the circuits to be controlled. Each channel is fitted with a hardware over-ride switch which is accessible from the front panel. This switch also provides visual indication of the state of each channel. The relays are very robust and are fully rated for difficult lighting loads.

technical data

Control Supply 100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.25A Outputs 4 x Switched feed thru outputs at 20A (inductive). Maximum device load 80A Relays Rated switch current: 50A resistive, 20A lighting load Rated inrush current: 500A Rated switching voltage: 440V AC Supported wiring schemes • Single Phase and Neutral • Three Phase and Neutral (Star) Control IO 1 x DMX512 / RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x programmable dry contact AUX input

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals Line In, Line Out for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Circuit run time tracking Compliance CE, C-Tick

User Controls Service Over-ride switch for each channel Diagnostic LED

Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing

Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller

Construction Polycarbonate DIN rail enclosure (6 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 105mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.8kg

load compatibility

All Types of switched loads up to 20A inductive

DDRC420FR

Relay Controller

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions 105

CH1 - IN CH1 - OUT

Control L Supply: N 100-240V 0.25A E 1 Phase

CH2 - IN CH2 - OUT CH3 - IN CH3 - OUT CH4 - IN CH4 - OUT

59

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

Shield

94.5

µP

DyNet RS485

38

51

75

69 46



DDRC420FR Data Sheet Rev J April 2011


DDRC820FR

Relay Controller

The DDRC820FR is designed to control any type of switched load. The power circuit is of a “feed through” design and is electrically equivalent to a 8 pole contactor, with the additional advantage of each pole being separately controllable via the DyNet network. The DDRC820FR is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled. Each channel is fitted with a hardware override switch which is accessible from the front panel.

technical data

Control Supply 100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.25A Outputs 8 x Switched feed through outputs at 20A (inductive). Maximum device load 160A Relays Rated switch current: 50A resistive, 20A lighting load Rated inrush current: 500A Rated switching voltage: 440V AC Supported wiring schemes • Single Phase and Neutral • Three Phase and Neutral (Star) Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port 1 x programmable dry contact AUX input User Controls Service Over-ride switch for each channel Diagnostic LED Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals Line In, Line Out for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Diagnostic Functions Circuit run time tracking Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Polycarbonate DIN rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 1.0kg

load compatibility

All Types of switched loads up to 20A inductive

DDRC820FR

Relay Controller

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

CH1 IN

CH1 OUT

CH2 IN

CH2 OUT

CH3 IN

CH3 OUT

CH4 IN

CH4 OUT

CH5 IN

CH5 OUT

CH6 IN

CH6 OUT

CH7 IN

CH7 OUT

CH8 IN

CH8 OUT

Supply: L 100-240V 0.25A N 1 Phase E

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

Shield

µP

DyNet RS485



DDRC820FR Data Sheet Rev K April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDRC1220FR-GL Relay Controller

The DDRC1220FR-GL is designed to control any type of switched load. The power circuit is a “feed through” design and is electrically equivalent to a 12 pole contactor, with the additional advantage of each pole being separately controllable via the DyNet network. The DDRC1220FR-GL is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled. Each channel is fitted with a hardware override switch which is accessible from the front panel.

technical data

Control Supply 100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.25A Outputs 12 x Switched feed thru outputs at 20A (inductive) Relays Rated switch current: 50A resistive, 20A lighting load Rated inrush current: 500A Rated switching voltage: 440V AC Supported wiring schemes: • Single Phase and Neutral • Three Phase and Neutral (Star) Maximum Device Load 180A Control Inputs 1 x DMX512 / RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x programmable dry contact AUX input User Controls Service Over-ride switch for each channel Diagnostic LED Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals Line In, Line Out for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Circuit run time tracking Network Watchdog Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Polycarbonate DIN rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 1.1kg

load compatibility

Load Type (Max load may be limited by 500A inrush rating) All Types of switched loads up to 20A inductive

DDRC1220FR-GL Relay Controller

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

CH1 IN

CH1 OUT

CH2 IN

CH2 OUT

CH3 IN

CH3 OUT

CH4 IN

CH4 OUT

CH5 IN

CH5 OUT

CH6 IN

CH6 OUT

CH7 IN

CH7 OUT

CH8 IN

CH8 OUT

CH9 IN

CH9 OUT

CH10 IN

CH10 OUT

CH11 IN

CH11 OUT

CH12 IN

CH12 OUT

Supply: L 100-240V 0.25A N 1 Phase E

Shield GND D+ D+VE AUX

µP

DyNet RS485



DDRC1220FR-GL Data Sheet Rev J April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DRC1205

Relay Controller

The DRC1205 is a 12 channel relay controller, with a maximum load of 5A per channel. It is used for switching both lighting and non-lighting loads. In areas where it is beneficial to sequentially switch on large lighting loads, such as factories and indoor sporting arenas, the DRC1205 can be programmed to stagger the switch on of the lights, to minimise peak demand current.

technical data

Supply 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 20A per phase or 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 60A Outputs 12 x switched outputs at 5A (total device load is 60A) Protection 3 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers Switching Device Relay 10A nom. (resistive) Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x programmable dry contact AUX input User Controls Service Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller Philips Dynalite Accessory Module enabled

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels) Preset Scenes 120 Supply Terminals L1, L2, L3, N 1 x 10mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals Line, Neutral for each channel 2 x 4mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided Cable Entries Mains – 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plate Data – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 450mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 4.8kg

load compatibility

options

All switched loads up to 5A

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Combined MCB and RCD internal protection fitted – RCBO

DRC1205

Relay Controller

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

Supply: CH1 N CH2 N CH3 N CH4 N

CH5 N CH6 N CH7 N CH8 N

75 mm

L1 L2 L3 N E

80 mm

230V 20A 3 Phase or 230V 60A 1 Phase

225 mm 165 mm


DyNet RS485



DRC1205 Data Sheet Rev O April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

450 mm

480 mm

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

SHIELD

500 mm

µP

DRC810DT Relay Controller

The DRC810DT relay controller is designed for operation of general purpose switched loads in applications where facilities for input connection are also required. Incorporating voltage free change-over SPDT output relays, the DRC810DT is ideal for controlling bi-directional motors, such as those used for curtains. The device is also suitable for connection to third-party systems where a low voltage contact interface is required. Multipurpose programmable dry contact and analogue inputs are also provided for interfacing to other devices. The DRC810DT also incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.1A


Switched Outputs 8 x SPDT voltage free changeover contacts maximum ratings for each output: - NO contact – 10A 250V AC (resistive) 10A 30V DC (resistive) TV8 rated - NC contact – 5A 250V AC (resistive) 5A 30V DC (resistive) * Snubbers/spark killers not fitted, de-rate for reactive loads. * All 8 outputs must be on the same Phase. * Functional isolation only between switched outputs, do not mix SELV and non-SELV loads on the same DRC810DT.

Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals Line, Neutral 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals C, NO, NC for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Earth link bar provided Cable Entries Mains – 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plate Data – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout

Maximum Total Box Load 80A

Dry Contact Terminals 1 x 1mm2 max conductor size

Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input 8 x multi-purpose programmable dry contact / 0-5V / 0-10V DC analogue inputs

Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status

User Controls Service Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller

Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 320mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 3.5kg

load compatibility

Any switched load, up to 10A per channel Dry contact interface units Blind motors

Loads requiring changeover contacts Curtain motors

DRC810DT Relay Controller

electrical diagram IN1

A/D

IN2

A/D

IN3

A/D

IN4 Dry Contact & Analogue IN5 Inputs

A/D

IN6

A/D

IN7

A/D

IN8

A/D

mounting dimensions C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC

A/D

0V 5V

L N E

CH2

CH3

CH4 Dry Contact Outputs CH5

CH6

CH7

CH8

AUX

D-

DyNet RS485

+12V

D+

GND

µP

SHIELD

Supply: 230V 0.1A 1 Phase

CH1



DRC810DT Data Sheet Rev J April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DRC1210 & DRC1220GL Relay Controllers The DRC1210 and DRC1220GL are 12 channel relay controllers, with a maximum load per channel of 10A and 20A respectively. They are used for switching both lighting and non-lighting loads. Both controllers have an optional accessory card for control of electronic dimmable ballasts. In areas where it is beneficial to sequentially switch on large lighting loads, such as factories and indoor sporting arenas, the DRC1210 and DRC1220GL can be programmed to stagger the switch on of the lights, to minimise peak demand current.

technical data

Supply DRC1210 - 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 40A, or 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 40A per phase DRC1220GL - 230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 63A per phase


Outputs DRC1210 - 12 x switched outputs at 10A (max device load is 120A) DRC1220GL - 12 x switched outputs at 20A (max device load is 180A)

Supply Terminals DRC1210 - L1, L2, L3 1 x 16mm2 max conductor size DRC1220GL - L1, L2, L3 1 x 35mm2 max conductor size

Protection DRC1210 - 12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers DRC1220GL - 12 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers

Output Terminals Line for each channel 1 x 10mm2 max conductor size Neutral Link bar provided Earth Link bar provided

Relay DRC1210 & DRC1220GL - Relay - 50A 230V AC inductive (5000W lighting load rated)

Cable Entry Mains – 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts mounted on a 100mm x 50mm removable gland plate Data – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Outputs - 6 x 25mm

Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX 1 x programmable dry contact AUX input User Controls Service Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED

Preset Scenes 170

Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 457mm x W 252mm x D 126mm (excludes wall brackets) (-RCBO version H 585mm) Weight 10.25kg

load compatibility

options

Any switched load

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO (note larger enclosure)

DRC1210 & DRC1220GL Relay Controllers electrical diagram

Supply: 230V 3 Phase

mounting dimensions

L1 L2 L3 N E

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

SHIELD

µP

N N N N N N N N N N N N

DyNet RS485



DRC1210 & DRC1220GL Data Sheet Rev S April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

Leading Edge Dimmer Controllers

Leading Edge Dimmer Controllers are ideal for lighting circuits with resistive and inductive properties, including mains voltage incandescent fittings, neon and low voltage lamps with a compatible electronic transformer. Available in both DIN rail and wall box configuration, Philips Dynalite supports a vast range of leading edge dimmer controllers with a variety of circuit numbers and sizes to work individually or part of a system, fitting any project requirement. Standard built-in features of the dimmers include: • power conditioning to protect lamps • over voltage • surge protection • brownout/sag protection Standard features will increase lamp life, reducing the ongoing running costs.

DDLE802

Leading Edge Dimmer Controller

The DDLE802 is an 8 channel leading edge dimmer with a maximum load per channel of 2 Amps. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent fixtures. It is also highly recommended for use in residential and hotel applications. The DDLE802 features Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies, which protect low voltage lamps and dramatically increase lamp life. The front panel of the DDLE802-MO (Manual Over-ride) version includes a rear-lit keypad that provides status indication and local control of individual channels. It also features an LED illuminated service switch for diagnostics and local over-ride. Adjacent to the keypad is a network socket for ease of programming. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard, optionally next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 16A


Outputs 8 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 2A. Maximum device load is 16A.

Preset Scenes 170

Protection Each pair of channels protected by a replaceable 6.3A time delay M205 fuse Regulating Device Triac - 20A, 600V, 200A surge Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit fade resolution (65,536 steps) Cooling System Naturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet and DMX512 serial port 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input User Controls Server Switch LED

load compatibility

options

Incandescent Iron core transformers Leading edge electronic transformers

- 120V supply option -120V - 100V supply option -100V - Manuel over-ride -MO

Supply Terminals 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size Line, Neutral, Earth Output Terminals Line, Neutral for each channel, 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size Diagnostic Functions Circuit run time tracking on each channel Device Online/Offline status Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure Poly Carbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.94kg

DDLE802


electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

T 6 .3A M205

Supply: 230V 16A 1 Phase

L N E

CH1 N CH2 N T 6 .3A M205

CH3 N CH4 N T 6.3A M205

CH5 N CH6 N T 6.3A M205

CH7 N CH8 N

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

SHIELD

µP

DyNet RS485



DDLE802 Data Sheet Rev J April 2011


DLE1203


The DLE1203 is a 12 channel leading edge energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 3A and a total device load of 32A. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent fixtures. It is especially suitable for residential applications. When used with Philips Dynalite’s System Integrator, the lighting control system can be integrated into a total smart home solution including security, HVAC, home theatre, blind control and exterior lighting. The DLE1203 protects low voltage lamps and dramatically increases lamp life, through utilisation of Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 32A Outputs 12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 3A (total device load is 32A) Protection 2 x 16A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers Regulating Device Triac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps) Cooling System Naturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals Line, Neutral 2 x 4mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals Line, Neutral for each channel 2 x 4mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided Cable Entries Mains – 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plate Data – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick

Interference Suppression Iron powder toroidal choke


Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x programmable dry contact AUX input

Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish

User Controls Service Switch Diagnostic LED

Dimensions H 450mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 6.0kg

load compatibility

options

Incandescent Neon

Extra RS485 DyNet / DMX512 port -A Circuit breaker trip reporting -BT

Iron core transformers Leading edge electronic transformers

DLE1203


L N E

CH1 N CH2 N CH3 N CH4 N CH5 N CH6 N CH7 N CH8 N CH9 N CH10 N CH11 N CH12 N

80 mm


mounting dimensions

75 mm

electrical diagram

225 mm 165 mm

DyNet RS485



DLE1203 Data Sheet Rev I April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

450 mm

480 mm

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

SHIELD

500 mm

µP

DLE405


The DLE405 is a 4 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 5A. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent lighting. Where retail merchandise is on display, the DLE405 protects low voltage lamps and dramatically increases lamp life. This is achieved through Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies.

technical data



Outputs 4 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 5A

Preset Scenes 170

Protection 4 x 6A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers


Regulating Device Triac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge

Output Terminals Line, Neutral for each channel 2 x 4mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided

Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit Fader resolution (65536 steps) Cooling System Naturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance Interference Suppression Iron powder toroidal choke Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x programmable dry contact AUX input User Controls Service Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED

Cable Entries Mains – 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plate Data – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 320mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 4.2kg

load compatibility

options

Incandescent Neon


Circuit breaker trip reporting -BT Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A

Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO (note larger enclosure)

DLE405


L

CH1

N

N

E

75 mm


mounting dimensions

80 mm

electrical diagram

CH2 N CH3 N

225 mm 165 mm

CH4 N

320 mm

345 mm

365 mm

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

SHIELD

µP

DyNet RS485



DLE405 Data Sheet Rev O April 2011


DLE1205


The DLE1205 is a 12 channel leading edge dimmer with a maximum load per channel of 5A and a total device load of 60A. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent fixtures. The combination of load capacity, sub circuit protection and attractive pricing makes it especially suitable for residential and small commercial applications. When used with the Philips Dynalite range of integration accessories, the lighting control system can be integrated into a total smart home solution including security, HVAC, home theatre, blind control and exterior lighting. The DLE1205 protects low voltage lamps and dramatically increases lamp life. This is achieved through Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies.

technical data

Supply 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 20A per phase or 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 60A Outputs 12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 5A. Total device load is 60A. Protection 12 x 6A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers Regulating Device Triac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps) Cooling System Naturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance Interference Suppression Iron powder toroidal choke Rise Time 100μS at 230V Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port 1 x programmable dry contact AUX input User Controls Service Over-ride Switch/Over-ride Diagnostic LED 3 x Phase indicator LED Hardware bypass switches for each channel

load compatibility

options

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals L1, L2, L3 1 x 10mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals Line for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Neutral Link bar provided Earth Link bar provided Cable Entry Mains: 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts mounted on a 100mm x 50mm removable gland plate 6 x 25mm dia. knockouts on the right side of enclosure Data: 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 626mm x W 255mm x D 176mm (including wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 14kg

Incandescent Neon


Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Three Pole circuit breakers -3Pole Circuit breaker trip reporting -BT

Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO

DLE1205


electrical diagram Supply: 3 Phase: 400/230V 20A Single phase: 400/230V 60A

mounting dimensions CH1

L1 L2 L3 N E

255 mm 221 mm

CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

626 mm

582 mm

CH10

606 mm

CH9

CH11 CH12

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

15 mm



DLE1205 Data Sheet Rev S April 2011


176 mm

14 mm

DyNet RS485

147 mm

GND

SHIELD

µP

N N N N N N N N N N N N

DLE410


The DLE410 is a 4 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 10A. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. In applications where there can be numerous users, such as lecture theatres, the DLE410 can be configured with control panels and an IR Receiver to provide preset scenes for entry, set-up, cleaning and presentations. An over-ride capability for presenters can be provided using Philips Dynalite’s IR handset.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 40A Outputs 4 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 10A

Preset Scenes 170

Protection 4 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers


Regulating Device Triac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge

Output Terminals Line, Neutral for each channel 2 x 4mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided

Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit Fader resolution (65536 steps) Cooling System Naturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance Interference Suppression Iron powder toroidal choke Rise Time 100μS at 230V Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX 1 x programmable dry contact AUX input User Controls Service Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED Hardware bypass switches for each channel

load compatibility

options


Cable Entries Mains – 7 x 25mm dia. knockouts Data – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 300mm x W 212mm x D 144mm (excludes wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 8.8kg

Incandescent Neon


Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Circuit breaker trip reporting -BT

Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel -RCBO

DLE410


electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

S upply: L 230V 40A N 1 P has e E

C H1

C H2

C H3

C H4 N N N N

A UX

D-

+VE

D+

G ND

S hield

µP

DyNet R S 485



DLE410 Data Sheet Rev P April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DLE1210GL


The DLE1210GL is a 12 channel leading edge dimmer with a maximum load per channel of 10A and a total device load of 75A. It is suitable for control of large loads, including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE1210GL is the ideal choice in applications requiring reliability combined with large power handling. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres, shopping centres and auditoriums. The DLE1210GL protects low voltage lamps and dramatically increases lamp life. This is achieved through Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies.

technical data

Supply 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-phase at 25A per phase or 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 75A Outputs 12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 10A. Total device load is 75A. Protection 12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers Regulating Device Triac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps) Cooling System Naturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance Interference Suppression Iron powder toroidal choke Rise Time 100μS at 230V Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port 1 x programmable dry contact AUX input User Controls Service Switch Over-ride Diagnostic LED 3 x Phase indicator LEDs Hardware bypass switches for each channel

load compatibility

options

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals L1, L2, L3 1 x 16mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals Line output for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Neutral Link bar provided Earth Link bar provided Cable Entry Mains: 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts mounted on a 100mm x 50mm removable gland plate 6 x 25mm dia. knockouts on the right side of enclosure Data: 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 626mm x W 255mm x D 176mm (including wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 18kg

Incandescent Neon Iron core transformers

Leading edge dimmable electronic transformers

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Circuit breaker trip reporting -BT Three Pole circuit breakers -3Pole


DLE1210GL


electrical diagram


Supply: L1 3 Phase: L2 230 @ 25A L3 Single Phase: N 230 @ 75A E

N CH2 N CH3 N CH4 N CH5 N CH6 N CH7 N CH8 N CH9 N CH10 N CH11 N CH12 N

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

SHIELD

µP

DyNet RS485



DLE1210GL Data Sheet Rev G April 2011


DLE1210


The DLE1210 is a 12 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 10A. It is suitable for control of large loads, including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE1210 is the ideal choice in applications requiring reliability combined with large power handling capability. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres and auditoriums.

technical data

Supply 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase 40A per phase

at

Outputs 12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 10A, total box load is 120A max. Protection 12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers on each channel Regulating Device Triac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps) Cooling System Naturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance Interference Suppression Iron powder toroidal choke Rise Time 200μS at 230V Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port 1 x programmable AUX dry contact input User Controls Service/Override Switch Diagnostic LED 3 x Phase indicator LEDs Hardware bypass switches for each channel

load compatibility

options

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals Line1, Line2, Line3 1 x 16mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided Neutral Link bar provided Output Terminals Line for each channel 1 x 16mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided Neutral Link bar provided Cable Entries Mains - 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts on a 105mm x 145mm removable gland plate Data - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 600mm x W 345mm x D 187mm (excludes wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 30kg

Incandescent Neon

Leading edge electronic transformers Iron core transformers

Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel -RCBO

Circuit breaker trip reporting -BT Three Pole circuit breakers -3Pole

DLE1210


electrical diagram

N CH2 N

204mm

CH1

L1 L2 L3 N E

187mm


mounting dimensions

CH3 N CH4 N CH5

345mm

N CH6 N

265mm

CH7 N CH8 N CH9 N CH10 N CH11 N

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

SHIELD

µP

DyNet RS485



DLE1210 Data Sheet Rev K April 2011


640mm

N

620mm

CH12

DLE120-S


The DLE120-S is a single channel energy management controller with a maximum load of 20A. It is suitable for the control of large loads including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE120- S is designed for applications where lamp life is critical, such as where lamp maintenance is difficult or expensive. It complements Philips Dynalite’s multi-channel dimmers by providing an extra channel when additional load capacity is required.

technical data



Outputs 1 x dimmed output (leading edge phase control) at 20A,

Preset Scenes 170

Protection No internal protection, supply from a 20A circuit breaker.


Regulating Device Dual SCR’s 800V 65A nom. 800A surge

Output Terminals Line, Neutral 2 x 4mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided

Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps)

Cable Entries Mains - 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plate Data - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Dry Contact Terminal 1 x 1mm2 max conductor size

Cooling System Naturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance




Rise Time 200μS at 230V


Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port 8 x dry contact/0-5V/0-10V analogue 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input


User Controls Service/Override Switch Diagnostic LED


load compatibility options

Incandescent Neon

Second R5485 DyNet/ - A DMX512 part


DLE120-S


CH1

L N

75 mm


mounting dimensions 80 mm

electrical diagram

N

E

5V 0V

225 mm 165 mm

AUX

D-

+VE

D+



DLE120-S Data Sheet Rev G April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

320 mm

345 mm

DyNet RS485

365 mm

GND

SHIELD

µP

DLE220-S


The DLE220-S is a 2 channel energy management controller with a maximum load of 20A per channel. It is suitable for control of large loads, including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE220-S is designed for applications where lamp life is critical, such as where lamp maintenance is difficult or expensive. It complements Philips Dynalite’s multi-channel dimmers by providing extra channels when additional load capacity is required. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres and auditoriums.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 40A Outputs 2 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 20A, total box load is 40A max Protection 2 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers on each channel Regulating Device Dual SCRs - 800V 65A nom. 800A surge Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps) Cooling System Naturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance Interference Suppression Iron powder toroidal choke Rise Time 200μS at 230V Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port 1 x programmable AUX dry contact input User Controls Service/Override Switch Diagnostic LED Hardware Over-ride switch on each channel

load compatibility

options

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals Line, Neutral 1 x 16mm2 max conductor size Earth link bar Output Terminals Line, Neutral for each channel 1 x 16mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided Cable Entries Mains - 3 x 25mm dia. knockouts Data - 1 x 25mm dia. knockouts Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Aluminium/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 285mm x W 210mm x D 150mm (excludes wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 4.2kg

Incandescent Neon


Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Circuit breaker trip reporting -BT

Earth leakage and override protection on each channel -RCBO

DLE220-S


electrical diagram

mounting dimensions 1 mm 176 mm

CH1

Supply: L 230V 40A N 1 Phase E

CH2

N

mm

mm

N

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

DyNet RS485

17 mm



DLE220-S Data Sheet Rev E April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

mm 176

1

mm

1

mm

GND

Shield

µP

DLE1220GL-S


The DLE1220GL-S is a 12 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 20A. It is suitable for control of large loads, including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE1220GL-S is the ideal choice in applications requiring reliability combined with large power handling capability. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres and auditoriums.

technical data


at

Outputs 12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 20A, total box load is 180A max. Protection 12 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers on each channel Regulating Device Dual SCRs - 800V 65A nom. 800A surge Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps) Cooling System Naturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance Interference Suppression Iron powder toroidal choke Rise Time 200μS at 230V Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port 1 x programmable AUX dry contact input User Controls Service/Override Switch Diagnostic LED 3 x Phase indicator LEDs Hardware Over-ride switch on each channel

load compatibility

options

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals Line1, Line2, Line3 1 x 35mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided Neutral Link bar provided Output Terminals Line for each channel 1 x 16mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided Neutral Link bar provided Cable Entries Mains - 5 x 25mm dia. knockouts on a 105mm x 145mm removable gland plate Data - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Channel override switches Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 600mm x W 345mm x D 187mm (excludes wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 35kg

Incandescent Neon


Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Circuit breaker trip reporting -BT Three Pole circuit breakers -3Pole

Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel -RCBO

DLE1220GL-S


electrical diagram

N CH2 N

204mm

CH1

L1 L2 L3 N E

187mm


mounting dimensions

CH3 N CH4 N CH5

345mm

N CH6 N

265mm

CH7 N CH8 N CH9 N CH10 N CH11 N

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

SHIELD

µP

DyNet RS485



DLE1220GL-S Data Sheet Rev J April 2011


640mm

N

620mm

CH12

Trailing Edge Dimmer Controllers

Compatible with main voltage incandescent fittings and low voltage electronic transformers, the Philips Dynalite range of trailing edge dimmer units bring together the very best in lighting control technology. All units support a three phase supply making them ideal for track-lighting dimming applications. Utilising trailing edge dimming techniques can achieve the quietest style of dimming for projects where noise is critical. This makes trailing edge dimmers the perfect choice for art galleries, museums, music hall and lecture rooms. Builtin power conditioning to protect lamps from over voltage, surge protection, brownout/sag protection increases lamp life, reducing ongoing project maintenance costs.

DTE310

Trailing Edge Dimmer Controller

The DTE310 is a 3 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 10A. It has a trailing edge output, making it suitable for use with most types of dimmable electronic transformers. The DTE310 can operate from a three phase or single phase supply, and is especially suited for controlling track mounted fixtures on three circuit track. Using a three phase supply when the DTE310 is connected to three circuit track allows the track to be loaded to it’s maximum rating. Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies protect lamps, dramatically extending their life. Multipurpose programmable dry contact and analogue inputs are provided for interfacing to other systems such as AV controllers. The device also incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and macro functions.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 30A or 230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 10A Outputs 3 x dimmed outputs (trailing edge phase control) at 10A each Protection 3 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers Internal inductive load detection Over voltage / current detection Regulating Devices Dual MOSFET’s - 47A, 650V, 141A surge Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit Fader resolution (65536 steps) Cooling System Naturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input 8 x multi-purpose programmable dry contact/0-5V/0-10V DC analogue inputs

load compatibility

options

Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Supply Terminals L1, L2, L3, N. 1 x 16mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals L, N, for each channel 1 x 16mm2 max conductor size Earth link bar provided Dry Contact Terminal 1 x 1mm2 max conductor size Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish

User Controls Service Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED Hardware bypass switch for each channel

Dimensions H 450mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets)

Trailing edge electronic transformers Incandescent lamps

Leading edge electronic transformers Track lighting


Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Three Pole isolators -3Pole

Weight Packed weight 6kg

DTE310



CH1

L1 Supply: L2 230V 30A L3 3 Phase N E

N

75 mm

electrical diagram

CH2 N CH3 N

225 mm

AUX

D-

+VE

D+



DTE310 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011


450 mm

480 mm

DyNet RS485

500 mm

GND

SHIELD

165 mm

DTE1210


The DTE1210 is a 12 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 10A. It has a trailing edge output, making it suitable for use with most types of dimmable electronic transformers. The DTE1210 can operate from a three phase or single phase supply, and is especially suited for controlling track mounted fixtures on three circuit track. Using a three phase supply when the DTE1210 is connected to three circuit track allows the track to be loaded to it’s maximum rating. Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies protect lamps, dramatically extending their life. The power circuit for each channel is contained within plug in modules for ease of maintenance. The device incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process complex conditional and sequential logic and macro functions. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres and auditoriums.

technical data


at

Outputs 12 x dimmed outputs (trailing edge phase control) at 10A, total box load is 120A max. Protection 12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers on each channel Internal inductive load detection Over voltage / current detection Regulating Device Dual MOSFET’s - 47A, 650V, 141A surge Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps) Cooling System Naturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port 1 x programmable AUX dry contact input User Controls Service Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED 3 x Phase indicator LEDs Hardware bypass switch for each channel

load compatibility

options

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals Line1, Line2, Line3, Neutral 1 x 16mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided Output Terminals Line, Neutral for each channel 1 x 16mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided Cable Entries Mains - 4 x 25mm2 knockouts on a 133mm x 44mm removable gland plate Data - 1 x 25mm2 dia. knockout Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 610mm x W 290mm x D 190mm (excludes wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 16.7kg

Trailing edge electronic transformers Incandescent lamps

Leading edge electronic transformers Track lighting

Three pole isolators -3POLE Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A


DTE1210


electrical diagram



L1 L2 L3 N E

N CH2 N CH3 N CH4 N CH5 N CH6 N CH7 N CH8 N CH9 N CH10 N CH11 N CH12 N

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

SHIELD

µP

DyNet RS485



DTE1210 Data Sheet Rev F April 2011


Signal Dimmer Controllers

The Philips Dynalite range of Signal Dimmer Controllers, have been engineered to meet the future demands of projects. They are capable of transmitting all industry standard ballast signals (1-10V, DSI, DALI and Broadcast DALI) and support installation opportunities of both DIN rail and wall box, to allow for flexible install opportunities. The Signal Dimmer Controller range also support a vast range of ballast controllers with a variety of circuit numbers and sizes to work individually or as part of a system, suiting any project requirement.

DDBC516FR

Dimmer Controller

The DDBC516FR is designed to provide cost effective control of DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts. Each of the five control outputs support DALI broadcast, DALI Addressed, 1-10V and DSI protocols. The control signals can be programmed to operate in tandem with the five internal switched outputs, which will automatically isolate the power circuit when all associated channels are at 0%. This feature is useful for energy savings applications, as DALI ballasts draw a significant amount of power when the lamps are turned off via a DALI command. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers supplying power to the controlled lighting circuits. The DDBC516FR contains an integral DALI bus power supply, removing the need for an additional external device.

technical data

Control Circuit Supply 100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A Control Outputs 5 x Control Outputs, each selectable to; - DALI broadcast: max 10 DALI loads/ch - DALI addressed: max 10 DALI loads/ch - 1-10V: max 10mA Sink or Source/ch - DSI: max 5 DSI loads/ch

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 5 panel) Preset Scenes 170

Mains Outputs 5 x 16 Amp feed thru switched circuits for ballast mains supply

Diagnostic Functions Lamp failure reporting Ballast failure reporting Ballast run time tracking for each ballast and the switched output Device Online/Offline status

Control Inputs 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input

Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Bus Power Supply Internal DALI bus power supply

Output Terminals 5 x Ballast power circuit Line In, Line out 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size 5 x Ballast control circuit - Dx, Dx 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

User Controls Over-ride switch for each switched channel On/Off status indicator for each switched output Service Switch Diagnostic LED

Operating Environment 0˚ to 40˚C ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non-condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 units wide) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.8kg

load compatibility

DALI, DSI and 1-10V HF ballasts DALI, DSI and 1-10V transformers

DALI, DSI and 1-10V LED drivers DALI, DSI and 1-10V Relay Modules

DDBC516FR

Dimmer Controller

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

Supply: L 100-240V N 50/60Hz 1 Phase E

CH1 Out CH1 In CH2 Out CH2 In CH3 Out CH3 In CH4 Out CH4 In CH5 Out CH5 In

1-10V/DSI/DALI

Ballast DA 1 Ballast DA 1

1-10V/DSI/DALI


1-10V/DSI/DALI


1-10V/DSI/DALI


1-10V/DSI/DALI


Shield Gnd RS485 DDyNet D+ +12V AUX



DDBC516FR Data Sheet Rev B April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DBC905

Dimmer Controller

The Philips Dynalite DBC905 high frequency fluorescent dimmer controller is designed for direct installation within ceiling cavities. Each control output support DALI broadcast, DALI Addressed, 1-10V and DSI protocols. For ease of installation and maintenance the device incorporates structured wiring connectors, which enables the unit to be readily connected without the use of tools. The DBC905 can be readily integrated with a Building Management System (BMS) via the DyNet control network, making it ideally suited to commercial office installations where a cost effective control solution is required. The device design provides easy connection without the use of tools and is available for three popular wiring brands; CMS Electracom (Modular Wiring) - DBC905C, Wieland - DBC905W and Wago - DBC905MA.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 16A Outputs 1 x Maintained NC switched output at 5A resistive (not in WA) 9 x Switched outputs, each rated at 5A resistive, 2A electronic ballast, 100A surge (max load per block of 3 channels is 5A) Protection 3 x 6.3A replaceable HRC fuses Fuse 1 feeds Channels 1, 2, 3 (max load allowed for sum of Channels 1, 2, 3 is 5A) Fuse 2 feeds Channels 4, 5, 6 (max load allowed for sum of Channels 4, 5, 6 is 5A) Fuse 3 feeds Channels 7, 8, 9, Maintained switched output (max load allowed for sum of Channels 7, 8, 9, MO is 5A) Control Outputs 9 x Control Outputs, each selectable to; - DALI broadcast: max 5 DALI loads per ch. - DALI addressed: max 5 DALI loads per ch. - 1-10V: max 10mA Sink or Source per ch. - DSI: max 5 DSI loads per ch.

DBC905W

Control IO Local DyNet RS485: - 1 x RS485 DyNet Serial Port / DMX - 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input - 4 x RJ12 DyNet connections for multifunction sensors (motion, PE illuminance, and IR receive), user panels and other interface devices. Recommended total devices per RJ12 socket - 5, up to max. of 10. Max. total devices for all sockets - 20 Floor DyNet RS485: - 1 x RS485 DyNet Serial Port (functionally isolated from mains)

Control Inputs 4 x voltage free single pole double throw (SPDT) switch inputs, momentary or latch User Controls Service Over-ride Switch - all channels to 100% Diagnostic LED DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 400mA Preset Scenes 170 Diagnostic Functions* Lamp Failure Ballast failure Circuit run time tracking/lamp life Automated battery tests Device Online/Offline status * DLight, DTK600 Touchscreen or BAS interface is required for analysing diagnostic data. The availability of some diagnostics is dependent on the ballast type.

Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure Moulded ABS Dimensions H 189mm x W 416mm x D 35mm Weight Packed weight 2.0kg

Example DALI Ballast Limit Calculations DALI ballasts with 15A startup inrush: 5 per channel. In this example the number of ballasts is limited by the control output limit of 5 DALI loads. DALI ballasts with 40A startup inrush: 2 per channel. In this example the number of ballasts is limited by the switched circuit rating of 100A surge.

load compatibility

options

DALI, DSI and 1-10V HF ballasts DALI, DSI and 1-10V transformers DALI, DSI and 1-10V LED drivers Switched loads Increased capacity - 165A surge switched outputs, 10 DALI loads per channel -HD

DBC905

Dimmer Controller

connector order codes Local DyNet Terminals 4 x RJ12 and 6 pole removable terminal socket Compatible screw terminal connectors Wieland: Standard version: Type: Wiecon 8113 Wieland Order No: 25.320.3653.0 (box of 50) Strain relieved version: Type: Wiecon 8113 Wieland Order No: 25.320.8653.0 (box of 50) Phoenix Contact: Standard version: Type: Combicon MSTB 2,5/6-ST Pheonix Order No: 1754520 (box of 50) PTR: Standard version: PTR Order No: AK950/6-5-0-GREEN Strain relieved version: PTR Order No: AK950/6L-5.0GREEN

6 pole removable terminal socket

Standard

Strain Relieved

Switch Input & Floor Network Terminals 5 x 3 pole removable terminal sockets Compatible screw terminal connectors: Wieland: Standard version: Type: Wiecon 8113 Wieland Order No.: 25.320.3353.0 (box of 100) Strain relieved version: Type: Wiecon 8113 Wieland Order No: 25.320.8353.0 (Box of 100) Phoenix: Standard version: Type: Combicon MSTB 2.5/3-ST Order No.: 1754465 Strain relieved version: Type: Combicon MSTB 2,5/3STZ-5,08 Pheonix Order No:1776168 (box of 50) PTR: Standard version: PTR Order No:AK950/3-5.0-GREEN Strain relieved version: PTR Order No: AK950/3L-5.0GREEN

3 pole removable terminal socket

Standard

Strain Relieved

Supply and Output Connectors Please refer to Wieland, CMS or Wago Electracom for details on applicable connector and cable assemblies.

output connector pole assignments

DBC905C Output Connector Pole Assignments

DBC905W Output Connector Pole Assignments

L E N

M

0 DA

+ DB

L E N

M

0 DA

+ DB

DBC905

Dimmer Controller electrical diagram L N E

Supply: 230V 1 Phase 16 Amp

Replaceable Fuses T 6.3A H CH1 1-10V/DSI/DALI

Switch 1

CH2 1-10V/DSI/DALI

Switch 2

CH3 1-10V/DSI/DALI

Switch 3

CH4 Control Output Connectors

1-10V/DSI/DALI

Switch 4

CH5 1-10V/DSI/DALI

Floor DyNet RS485

GND D+ D-

CH6 1-10V/DSI/DALI

CH7 1-10V/DSI/DALI

Sensor 1

CH8

Sensor 2

1-10V/DSI/DALI

Sensor 3

CH9 1-10V/DSI/DALI

Sensor 4

SHIELD

Local DyNet RS485

GND D+ D+VE AUX

µP

DBC905

Dimmer Controller

mounting dimensions



DBC905 Data Sheet Rev K April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDBC120FR-DALI

Dimmer Controller

The DDBC120FR-DALIis designed for cost-effective control of DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts, providing a full universe of 64 DALI channels. Direct DALI to DyNet mapping means that the DALI-imposed limits, such as the maximum of 16 groups, are seamlessly overcome. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breaker that is supplying power to the controlled lighting circuit. The DDBC120FR-DALIcontains an integral DALI bus power supply, removing the need for the provision of a separate external supply.

technical data

Supply 100 -240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 20A


Control Outputs 1 x DALI control output, supporting one full DALI universe of 64 channels, including backward channel

Preset Scenes 170

Mains Outputs 1 x 20A feed thru switched circuits for DALI ballast mains supply.

Diagnostic Functions Lamp failure reporting Ballast failure reporting Ballast run time tracking for each ballast Device Online/Offline status

DALI Bus Power Supply Inbuilt 15V max 250mA (64 Ballast & 10 user interfaces) DALI Insulation System Basic Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input User Controls Service Over-ride Switch Diagnostic LED

Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals 1 x DALI Ballast circuit: DA-, DA+ 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size 1 x Ballast power circuit = Line in, Line out, Loop 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Operating Environment 0˚ to 40˚C ambient temperature 0% to 90% RH non-condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit) Dimensions H 94.5mm x W 105mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.35kg

load compatibility

DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts DALI electronic low-voltage transformers DALI LED fixtures

Philips Dynalite DALI UI devices

DDBC120FR-DALI

Dimmer Controller

electrical diagram


94.5

59

38

51

75

69 46



DDBC120FR-DALIData Sheet Rev K April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDBC300-DALI

Dimmer Controller

The DDBC300-DALI is designed for cost-effective control of DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts, providing 3 full DALI universes comprising 192 DALI channels. Direct DALI to DyNet mapping means that the DALI-imposed limits, such as the maximum of 16 groups, are seamlessly overcome. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breaker that is supplying power to the controlled lighting circuit. The DDBC300-DALI contains an integral DALI bus power supply, removing the need for an additional external device.

technical data

Supply 100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A Control Outputs 3 x DALI Control Outputs, each supporting a full DALI universe of 64 channels (192 total), including backward channel DALI Bus Power Supply Internal 15V rated 128mA per universe Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input User Controls Service Over-ride Switch Diagnostic LED

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Diagnostic Functions Lamp failure reporting Ballast failure reporting Ballast run time tracking for each ballast Device Online/Offline status Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals 3 x DALI Ballast circuits: DA-, DA+ 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Operating Environment 0˚ to 40˚C ambient temperature 0% to 90% RH non-condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.49kg

load compatibility


DDBC300-DALI

Dimmer Controller

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

DALI

DA LI 1 DA LI 1

DALI

DA LI 2 DA LI 2

DALI

DA LI 3 DA LI 3

L Supply: E 100-240V 0.5A 1 Phase N

D-

+VE AUX

D+

GND

SHIELD

µP

DyNet RS485



DDBC300-DALI Data Sheet Rev F April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDBC320-DALI

Dimmer Controller

The DDBC320-DALI is designed to provide cost effective control of DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts. It has three DALI outputs, allowing it to control up to 192 DALI devices. The DALI control signals can be programmed to operate in tandem with the three internal switched outputs, which will automatically isolate the power circuit when all associated DALI channels are at 0%. This feature is useful for energy savings applications, as DALI ballasts draw a significant amount of power when the lamps are turned off via a DALI command. Direct DALI to DyNet mapping means that the DALI imposed limits, such as the maximum of 16 groups, are seamlessly overcome. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers supplying power to the controlled lighting circuits. The DDBC320-DALI contains an integral DALI bus power supply, removing the need for an additional external device.

technical data

Supply 100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A Control Outputs 3 x DALI Control Outputs, each supporting a full DALI universe of 64 channels (192 total), including backward channel DALI Bus Power Supply Internal 15V rated 128mA per universe Mains Outputs 3 x 20 Amp feed thru switched circuits for DALI ballast mains supply Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input User Controls Service Over-ride Switch Diagnostic LED

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Diagnostic Functions Lamp failure reporting Ballast failure reporting Ballast run time tracking for each ballast and the switched output Device Online/Offline status Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals 3 x Ballast power circuit Line In, Line out, Loop, Loop, Loop 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size 3 x DALI Ballast circuits - DA-, DA+ 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Operating Environment 0˚ to 40˚C ambient temperature 0% to 90% RH non-condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.8kg

load compatibility


DDBC320-DALI

Dimmer Controller

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

CH1 Out

CH1 In N In

N Out

CH2 In

CH2 Out

N In

N Out

CH3 In

CH3 Out

N In

N Out

DALI

DALI 1 DALI 1

DALI

DALI 2 DALI 2

DALI

DALI 3 DALI 3

SHIELD GND D+ D+VE AUX

L Supply: 100-240V N 0.5A E 1 Phase

DyNet RS485



DDBC320-DALI Data Sheet Rev K April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DMBC110

Signal Dimmer & Relay Controller

The DMBC110 is designed to allow intelligent, networked control of individual lighting fixtures. The compact design enables the unit to be mounted directly within the gear enclosure of many fixtures. Each dimmer controller incorporates a relay output which can be used to control mains supply to the fixture and a HF ballast control output which can provide dimming control of DALI, 1-10V and DSI compatible ballasts and transformers. The relay is very robust and fully rated for difficult lighting loads.

technical data


Supply Terminals Line In, Neutral 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Switched Output 1 x relay output at 10A (inductive)

Output Terminals Mains: Line Out, Neutral 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Control Output 1 x output selectable to: DALI Broadcast, 1-10V, DSI Control Output Capacity DALI Ballasts and transformers: 5 0-10V: 10mA source or 20mA sink DSI Ballasts and transformers: 15

Control: B1, B2 1 x 1.5mm2 max conductor size Operating Environment 0˚ to 50˚C ambient temperature 0% to 90% RH non-condensing

Switching Device Relay, Tungsten pilot contact, 16A resistive, 165A surge



Enclosure ABS plastic

Preset Scenes 170

Dimensions L 185mm x W 4mm x D 38mm


Weight Packed weight 0.19Kg

DyNet Supply 12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)

load compatibility

DALI, DSI and 1-10V HF Ballasts DALI, DSI and 1-10V transformers

All types of Switched loads

DMBC110

Signal Dimmer & Relay Controller

electrical diagram Supply: 230V 1 Phase 10A

mounting dimensions

CH1

L N 1-10V / DSI / DALI

B1 B2

+V E

D-

D+

GND

Shield

µP

DyNet RS485



DMBC110 Data Sheet Rev F April 2011


DBC410

Dimmer Controller

The DBC410 is designed for use with electronic dimmable fluorescent ballasts, either 1-10V or DSI. It has 4 heavy duty 10A relay outputs to switch fluorescent lighting or other loads in a DyNet energy management system. Four control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC and DSI, are provided for control of HF ballasts. These control outputs can operate in tandem with or separately from the switched outputs.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 40A Mains Outputs 4 x switched outputs at 10A Control Outputs 4 x 1-10V DC or DSI outputs DSI Mode: 100 DSI ballasts per channel 1-10V mode: 50mA sink, 50mA source per channel Overload Protection 4 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers Switching Device Relay 16A nom. (resistive) 165A surge

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 90mA (supply for approx. 4 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Supply Terminals Line, Neutral 1 x 10mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided Output Terminals Line, Neutral for each channel 2 x 4mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided


V/DSI, +V/DSI for each channel 1 x 2mm2 max conductor size

User Controls Service Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED

Cable Entries Mains - 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plate Data - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 320mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 4.0kg

load compatibility

options

Switched loads DSI high frequency fluorescent ballasts

DSI low voltage transformers 1-10V high frequency fluorescent ballasts

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel -RCBO

Circuit breaker trip reporting -BT

DBC410

Dimmer Controller

L N E


1-10V / DSI 1-10V / DSI 1-10V / DSI 1-10V / DSI

80mm


mounting dimensions

CH5 0 CH6 0 CH7 0 CH8 0

75mm

electrical diagram

225mm 165mm

320mm

345mm

DyNet RS485

365mm

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

SHIELD

µP



DBC410 Data Sheet Rev R April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DBC1205

Dimmer Controller

The DBC1205 is designed for use with electronic dimmable fluorescent ballasts, either 1-10V or DSI. It has 12 x 5A relay outputs to switch fluorescent lighting or other loads in a DyNet energy management system. Twelve control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC and DSI, are provided for control of HF ballasts.

technical data

Supply 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase Y at 20A per phase or 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 60A Outputs 12 x switched outputs at 5A 12 x HF ballast control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC and DSI Protection 3 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers Switching device Relay 10A nom. (resistive)

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 90mA (supply for approx. 4 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Supply Terminals L1, L2, L3, N 1 x 10mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals Line, Neutral for each channel 2 x 4mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided


IV/DSI, +V/DSI for each channel 1 x 2mm2 max conductor size


Cable Entries Mains - 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plate Data - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 450mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets) Weight Packed weight 5.2kg

load compatibility

options

Switched loads DSI high frequency fluorescent ballasts

DSI low voltage transformers 1-10V high frequency fluorescent ballasts

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Three pole circuit breakers -3POLE

Circuit breaker trip reporting -BT

DBC1205

Dimmer Controller

or

C H1 N C H2 N C H3 N C H4 N

L1 L2 L3 N E

230V 60A 1 P has e

80 mm

S upply: 230V 20A 3 P has e


electrical diagram


225 mm

165 mm

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

S HIE L D DyNet R S 485

1-10V / DSI

G ND D+

1-10V / DSI

D+VE A UX

µP

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI



DBC1205 Data Sheet Rev

April 2011


450 mm

1-10V / DSI

C H1 0 C H2 0 C H3 0 C H4 0 C H5 0 C H6 0 C H7 0 C H8 0 C H9 0 C H10 0 C H11 0 C H12 0

480 mm

1-10V / DSI

500 mm


DDBC1200

Dimmer Controller

The DDBC1200 is designed to provide cost effective control of high frequency fluorescent ballasts and dimmable transformers. Each DDBC1200 has 12 independent output channels, each selectable to DALI Broadcast, 0-10V or DSI. When in 0-10V output mode, the device is suitable for interfacing to equipment with an analogue input port such as air dampers. The device can also be linked to a separate relay module for control of 1-10V HF fluorescent ballasts. LED indicators reflect the status of each channel. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed on a switchboard next to the circuit breaker that is supplying power to the controlled lighting circuit.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A


Outputs 12 x control outputs, selectable to DALI 0-10V or DSI

Preset Scenes 170

Output Capacity DALI Broadcast Mode: 80 DALI ballasts per channel, 500 total 0-10V mode: 50mA sink, source per channel DSI Mode: 100 DSI ballasts per channel, 1200 total Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input User Controls Service Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED

Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals C, CH, for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Operating Environment 0° to 50°C ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.6kg

load compatibility

options

DSI high frequency fluorescent ballasts DSI electronic low voltage transformers DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts broadcast mode only DALI electronic low voltage transformers broadcast mode only Manual Override -MO Control panel on front cover

1-10V high frequency fluorescent ballasts Devices that require 0-10V analogue control signs

DdBC1200

Dimmer Controller

electrical diagram S upply: L 230V 0.5A N 1 P has e E

mounting dimensions

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

S HIE L D G ND

DyNet RS485

DALI 1-10V DSI

D+ D+VE A UX

µP

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

DALI 1-10V DSI

C H1 0 C H2 0 C H3 0 C H4 0 C H5 0 C H6 0 C H7 0 C H8 0 C H9 0 C H10 0 C H11 0 C H12 0



DBC410 Data Sheet Rev N April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DBC1210 & DBC1220GL Dimmer Controllers The DBC1210 & DBC1220GL are designed for use with DALI, 1-10V and DSI electronic dimmable fluorescent ballasts and transformers. They have 12 x 10A and 12 x 20A relay outputs respectively, to switch fluorescent lighting or other loads in a DyNet energy management system. Twelve control outputs, selectable to DALI Broadcast, 1-10V and DSI are provided for control of HF ballasts.

technical data

Supply DBC1210 - 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 40A per phase DBC1220GL - 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 63A per phase Switched Outputs DBC1210 - 12 x switched outputs at 10A (total device load is 120A) DBC1220GL - 12 x switched outputs at 20A (total device load is 180A) Control Outputs - DALI Broadcast mode: 64 ballast per channel, up to a maximum of 400 - 1-10V mode: 50mA sink/source per channel - DSI mode: 100 ballast per channel, up to a maximum of 1200 Overload Protection DBC1210 - 12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers DBC1220GL - 12 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers Switching Device DBC1210 & DBC1220GL - Relay - 50A 230V AC inductive (5000W lighting load rated) Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX 1 x programmable dry contact AUX input User Controls Service Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Supply Terminals DBC1210 - L1, L2, L3 1 x 16mm2 max conductor size DBC1220GL - L1, L2, L3 1 x 35mm2 max conductor size Neutral Link bar provided Earth Link bar provided Output Terminals Line for each channel 1 x 10mm2 max conductor size Neutral Link bar provided Earth Link bar provided V/DSI/DALI, +V/DSI/DALI for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Cable Entries Mains - 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts mounted on a 88mm x 88mm removable gland plate Data - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout Output - 6 x 25mm dia knockouts on side of chassis Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 90% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 457mm x W 252mm x D 126mm (-RCBO version H 585mm) Weight Packed weight 10.25kg

load compatibility

options

DALI fluorescent ballasts broadcast mode only DALI low voltage transformers 1-10V fluorescent ballasts

DSI fluorescent ballasts DSI low voltage transformers Switched loads

Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO (Note: larger enclosure)

Three pole circuit breakers -3POLE Circuit breaker trip reporting -BT

DBC1210 & DBC1220GL Dimmer Controllers electrical diagram

mounting dimensions N N N N N N N N N N N N


CH1

L1 L2 L3 N E

CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 1-10V / DSI / DALI 1-10V / DSI / DALI 1-10V / DSI / DALI 1-10V / DSI / DALI 1-10V / DSI / DALI

SHIELD GND

1-10V / DSI / DALI

DyNet D + RS485 D +VE AUX

µP

1-10V / DSI / DALI

1-10V / DSI

1-10V / DSI / DALI 1-10V / DSI / DALI 1-10V / DSI / DALI 1-10V / DSI / DALI 1-10V / DSI / DALI

1 COMM 2 COMM 3 COMM 4 COMM 5 COMM 6 COMM 7 COMM 8 COMM 9 COMM 10 COMM 11 COMM 12 COMM



DBC1210 & DBC1220GL Data Sheet Rev R April 2011


LED PWM Controllers

Capable of directly driving LED fittings, the Philips Dynalite LED dimmers use Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) technology to great effect. Perfectly suited to Red, Green, Blue (RGB) colour changing applications, chase sequencing or provision of elegant scene settings. The Philips Dynalite LED drivers come in a range of configurations to meet the compatibility requirements of many of the available LED fittings. Each device is ready to receive native DMX allowing them to be used in colour mixing or chase sequence applications.

DDLEDC60035

PWM Controller

The DDLEDC60035 is designed to control LED loads in decorative architectural lighting applications where creative colour mixing and sequencing is required. The controller provides six pulse width modulated common anode current mode outputs suitable for directly driving 350mA nominal current rated high intensity LED sources. Incorporating internal current regulation the controller is designed to directly operate series connected LED arrays without the need for any additional circuit devices. The device is supplied with a DIN rail mountable housing, designed for installation within a switchboard or suitable electrical enclosure. The DDLEDC60035 is DMX512 compatible and is suitable for the high chase speeds found in display lighting.

technical data

Supply Regulated 18-32VDC 2.5A LED Outputs 6 x 350mA current mode, common anode Minimum internal voltage drop 0.5V Outputs are short circuit protected Integral self resetting thermal overload protection Maximum Power Dissipation 6 Watts combined total for consecutive pairs of channels (Ch 1&2, Ch 3&4, Ch 5&6). 4 Watts per individual channel. 18 Watts Box Total Pd = (Vs - (Vdf x n)) x 0.35 Pd = Power dissipation per channel Vs = Supply voltage Vdf = Diode forward voltage n = Number of diodes in series per channel Maximum Supply Voltage Vs max = 8.5 + (n x Vled) or 32VDC, whichever is the lesser Vs max = Maximum supply voltage n = Number of diodes in series per channel Vled = LED forward voltage Minimum Supply Voltage Vs min = 4 + (n x Vled) or 18VDC, whichever is the greater Vs min = Minimum supply voltage n = Number of diodes in series per channel Vled = LED forward voltage Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port

load compatibility

350mA Current Mode Common Anode LED fixtures

User Controls Service switch Diagnostic LED DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals Positive, Negative, Earth 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals CH, COM for each channel 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction ABS DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 86mm x W 209mm x D 66mm Weight Packed weight 1.0kg

DDLEDC60035

PWM Controller

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions top view

COM CH2

86mm

CH1

COM CH3

100mm

COM

side view

CH4

209mm

CH5 COM

66mm

COM

CH6 COM

end view

DyNet/DMX512 RS485

60mm 47mm

48mm

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

µP

36mm

+ E

Shield

Supply: 18-32VDC 2.5A




DDLEDC60035 Data Sheet Rev I April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDLEDC401

PWM Controller

The DDLEDC401 is designed to control four channel (RGBW) LED loads in decorative architectural lighting applications where creative colour mixing and sequencing is required. The controller provides four pulse width modulated voltage mode outputs suitable for driving high intensity LED sources. Controller nominal output voltage is 24VDC and can optionally be ordered as 12V output. The device is available in two output configurations to accommodate common anode (DDLEDC401-CA) or common cathode (DDLEDC401-CK) loads. The device is supplied with a DIN rail mountable housing, designed for installation installed within a switchboard or suitable electrical enlosure. The DDLEDC401 is DMX512 compatible and is suitable for the high chase speeds found in display lighting.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 130 watts LED Outputs 4 x 1A (nominal) voltage mode Maximum per channel load 1A Maximum total box load 4A Outputs are short circuit protected 12V output optionally available (-12V)

options

Supply Terminals Phase, Neutral, Earth 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals CH, COM for each channel 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size

DDLEDC401-CA Output - 24V common anode


DDLEDC401-CK Output - 24V common cathode


Maximum Total Box Load 100 Watts at 24V output 50 Watts at 12V output (-12V version)



Construction ABS DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)

User Controls Service switch Diagnostic LED

Dimensions H 86mm x W 209mm x D 66mm


load compatibility

Preset Scenes 96

Voltage mode LED fixtures

120V input -IN120 12V output -OUT12


DDLEDC401

PWM Controller

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions top view

COM

86mm

CH1

CH2 COM

100mm

CH3

side view

COM

209mm

COM

Supply: A 230V 1A N 1 Phase E

66mm

CH4

µP

60mm 47mm

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

Shield

end view

36mm

48mm

DyNet/DMX512 RS485




DDLEDC401 Data Sheet Rev J April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDLEDC605-GL PWM Controller

The DDLEDC605-GL is designed to control LED loads in decorative architectural lighting applications where creative colour mixing and sequencing is required. The controller provides six pulse width modulated common anode voltage mode outputs suitable for directly driving high intensity LED sources. The controller is designed for connection to an external DC power supply enabling the unit to deliver a range of nominal output voltages. The device is supplied with a DIN rail mountable housing, designed for installation within a switchboard or suitable electrical enclosure. The DDLEDC605-GL is DMX512 compatible and is suitable for the high chase speeds commonly found in display lighting.

technical data

Supply External 20A regulated power supply Controller supply voltage range is 10-24VDC. LED Outputs 6 x 5A voltage mode, common anode Nominal output voltage is equal to the supply voltage, less internal voltage drop of max 0.5V Outputs are short circuit protected with integral self-resetting thermal overload protection Maximum Total Box Load 20A Control Inputs 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port User Controls Service switch Diagnostic LED DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels) Preset Scenes 170

load compatibility

Voltage Mode Common Anode LED fixtures

Supply Terminals Positive, Negative, Earth 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals CH, COM for each channel 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 105mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 1.0kg

DDLEDC605-GL PWM Controller

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions 105 CH1 COM CH2 COM CH3 COM

59

CH4 COM

COM

94.5

CH5

CH6 COM + E

69 46

51 38

DyNet/DMX512 RS485

75

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

µP

Shield

Supply: 10-24VDC 20A



DDLEDC605-GL Data Sheet Rev H April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

Multipurpose Controllers

Within any project many different lighting load types are required to achieve a desired result. Different lighting load types may require a different style of control. The Philips Dynalite range of multipurpose controllers allows customisation of the output types via different output module units. When using the DIN rail multipurpose controllers, a control type choice for each circuit can be made from relay, leading edge dimmer, trailing edge dimmer, ballast control, fan control and blind/screen control. In any combination, multiple load types can be controlled from a single device. The wall box multipurpose controller combines leading edge dimming, ballast control, and relay switching into one device. With 10A sized channels this device is perfectly suited as a standalone device for lecture theatres, board rooms and meeting rooms or working with other load controllers as part of a larger system.

DDMC802

Multipurpose Modular Controller

The DDMC802 is an 8 channel controller with a maximum load per channel of 2A. A variety of output modules are available to suit different types of loads and the DDMC802 can accept up to eight plug in modules, which by their removable design also facilitate ease of servicing. Available module types include: • Trailing edge phase control dimmer, suitable for use with most types of dimmable electronic transformers. • Leading edge phase control dimmer, suitable for incandescent lamps and some types of dimmable electronic transformers. • HF Ballast controller, suitable for controlling 1-10V and digital ballasts and transformers (a relay module should be paired with the HF ballast module when controlling 1-10V ballasts). • Relay module, suitable for most types of switched loads. • Fan control module. • Curtain control module. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard, optionally next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled.

technical data

HF Ballast

Trailing Edge

Curtain

Relay

Leading Edge

Fan

load compatibility

options

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 16A Output Options 8 x output slots at 2A each. Maximum device load 16A. A derating factor may need to be applied if installed in a smaller sealed switchboard when using Leading or Trailing edge modules, see Instruction Manual for details. Some modules occupy 2 slots. Available modules include: DDBM100 - 1 Channel; 1-10V or digital HF Ballast control. Occupies 1 slot DDCM102 - 1 Channel x 2A SPDT Curtain Control. Occupies 2 slots DDFM102 - 1 Channel 400VA Fan Control. Occupies 2 slots DDLM102 - 1 Channel x 2A Leading edge dimmer. Regulating Device - Triac - 20A, 600V. Occupies 1 slot DDLM104 - 1 Channel x 4A Leading edge dimmer. Regulating Device - Triac - 20A, 600V. Occupies 2 slots DDRM104 - 1 Channel x 4A relay. Switching device - Relay, 16A/250V TV5 100A surge. Occupies 1 slot DDTM102 - 1 Channel x 2A Trailing edge dimmer. Regulating Device - Dual MOSFET’s 22A, 500V, 88A surge. Occupies 1 slot Dimmer Module Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit fade resolution (65,536 steps) Front Panel Controls (-MO version) Channel Over-ride switches Channel status indicators Service Switch Service LED

Digital and 1-10V HF Ballasts Digital and 1-10V transformers Incandescent lamps Magnetic transformers Manual Over-ride and Status indicators -MO

Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet and DMX512 serial port 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels) Preset Scenes 170 User Controls Service Switch Diagnostic LED Diagnostic Functions Circuit run time tracking on each channel Device Online/Offline status Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size Output Terminals Line, Neutral for each channel, 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.94kg

Leading edge electronic transformers Switched loads Trailing edge electronic transformers

DDMC802


electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

T 6.3A M205

Output Card 1 Slot T 6.3A M205


Supply: 230V 16A 1 Phase L N E






Output Card 8 Slot

CH1 N CH2 N CH3 N CH4 N CH5 N CH6 N CH7 N CH8 N

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

GND

Shield

µP

DyNet RS485

module electrical diagrams CH A 1-10V DSI Digital

Module DDBM100 1-10V, DSI, Digital HF Ballast Controller

CH B

Module DDLM102 1 x 2A Module DDLM104 1 x 4A Leading Edge Dimmer

Module DDCM102 Curtain Controller

HI MED LO OFF

Module DDRM104 1 x 4 Amp Switched

Module DDTM102 1 x 2A Trailing Edge Dimmer

Module DDFM102 Fan Controller



DDMC802 Data Sheet Rev N April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDMC802GL


The DDMC802GL is an 8 channel controller with a nominal load per channel of 2A. A variety of output modules are available to suit different types of loads and the DDMC802GL can accept up to four plug in modules, which by their removable design also facilitate ease of servicing. Available module types include: • Trailing edge phase control dimmer, suitable for use with most types of dimmable electronic transformers. • Leading edge phase control dimmer, suitable for incandescent lamps and some types of dimmable electronic transformers. • HF Ballast controller, suitable for controlling DALI Broadcast, 1-10V and DSI ballasts and transformers. • Relay module, suitable for most types of switched loads. • Fan control module. • Curtain control module. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard, optionally next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled.

technical data

Supply 100-240 50/60Hz Single Phase at max. 16A


Output Options 4 x 2 channel output slots at 2A nominal per channel. Maximum device load is 10A. A derating factor may need to be applied if installed in a smaller sealed switchboard when using Leading or Trailing edge modules, see Instruction Manual for details. Some modules occupy 2 slots. Available modules include: DGBM200 - 2 Channel DALI Broadcast, 1-10V, DSI HF Ballast control. Occupies 1 slot DGCM102 - 1 Channel x 2A SPDT Curtain Control. Occupies 1 slot DGFM102 - 1 Channel 400VA Fan Control. Occupies 1 slot DGLM402 - 4 Channel x 2A Leading edge dimmer. Max. module total load 5A. Regulating Device - Triac - 20A, 600V. Occupies 2 slots DGLM105 - 1 Channel x 5A Leading edge dimmer. Regulating Device - Triac 20A, 600V. Occupies 2 slots DGRM204 - 2 Channel x 4A relay. Switching device - Relay, 16A TV5 100A surge. Occupies 1 slot DGTM402 - 4 Channel x 2A Trailing edge dimmer. Max. module total load 5A. Regulating Device - MOSFET’s 25A, 500V, 62A surge. Occupies 2 slots DGTM105 - 1 Channel x 5A Trailing edge dimmer. Regulating Device - MOSFET’s 25A, 500V, 62A surge. Occupies 2 slots

Preset Scenes 170

Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet & DMX512 serial port 8 x Programmable dry contact inputs

load compatibility

DSI high frequency fluorescent ballasts DSI electronic low voltage transformers 1-10V high frequency fluorescent ballasts

User Controls Service Switch Diagnostic LED Diagnostic Functions Circuit run time tracking on each channel Device Online/Offline status Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size Output Terminals Channel, Common for each channel, 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size Dry contact input terminals 1 x 10 pole removable terminal socket PTR item code: AK950/10-5-0-GREEN Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.94kg

Devices that require 0-10V analogue control signals

DDMC802GL


electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

T 6.3A M205

Output Card 1 Slot

T 6.3A M205

Output Card 2 Slot


T 6.3A M205

Output Card 3 Slot

T 6.3A M205

Output Card 4 Slot


µP

Shield GND DyNet D + RS485 D +VE AUX

module electrical diagrams



DDMC802GL Data Sheet Rev F April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDLE6RC202

Leading Edge/Relay Multipurpose Controller

The DDLE6RC202 is an eight channel controller with six leading edge dimming outputs and two switched outputs with a maximum load per channel of 2 Amps. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent fixtures, and any small switched load. It is also highly recommended for use in residential and hotel applications. The DDLE6RC202 features Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies, which protect low voltage lamps and dramatically increase lamp life. The front panel of the DDLE6RC202-MO (Manual Over-ride) version includes a rear lit keypad that provides status indication and local control of individual channels. It also features an LED illuminated service switch for diagnostics and local override. Adjacent to the keypad is a network socket for ease of programming. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard, optionally next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled.

technical data

Supply 230V 50/60Hz single phase & neutral at 16A Outputs 6 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 2A. 2 x switched outputs at 2A Maximum device load is 16A. A derating factor may need to be applied if installed in a smaller sealed switchboard, see Instruction Manual for details Overload Protection Each pair of channels protected by a replaceable 6.3A time delay M205 fuse Regulating Device Triac - 20A, 600V. Switching Device Relay - 10A Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs • Over voltage protection • Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection • Spike protection • Soft start • 16 bit fade resolution (65,535 steps) Front Panel Controls (-MO version) Channel Over-ride switches Channel Status indicators Service Switch Service LED RS485 DyNet port

load compatibility

Incandescent Iron core transformers

options

Manual Over-ride -MO

Control Inputs 1 x RS485 DyNet and DMX512 serial port 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input DyNet DC Supply 120mA Preset Scenes 170 Diagnostic Functions Circuit run time tracking on each channel Device Online/Offline status Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size Output Terminals Line, Neutral for each channel, 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure ABS DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 96mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.94kg

Leading edge electronic transformers Switched loads

DDLE6RC202

Leading Edge/Relay Multipurpose Controller

mounting dimensions

93mm

electrical diagram

75mm

211mm

150mm

69mm

38mm

51mm

75mm

46mm



DDLE6RC202 Data Sheet Rev B April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DMC810GL Leading Edge/Signal Dimmer Multipurpose Controller The DMC810GL multipurpose controller offers control of both incandescent lamps and electronic dimmable and switched ballasts and transformers. Four 10A circuit breakers protect 8 channels rated at 10A each for control of dimmable loads. Four control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC, DSI and DALI broadcast, are provided for control of HF ballasts. These control outputs can operate in tandem with or separately from, the switched outputs. The ability to control mixed load types from the one controller provides savings on initial capital costs, as well as installation.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 40A Outputs 4 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 10A each 4 x switched outputs at 10A 4 x HF ballast control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC, DSI and DALI Total box load is 40A Total switched load is 40A or Total dimmed load is 40A Overload Protection 4 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers Regulating Device Triac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels) Preset Scenes 170 Supply Terminals Line, Neutral 2 x 10mm2 max conductor size Output Terminals Line, Neutral for each channels 1-8 2 x 4mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided 0V/DSI/DALI, +V/DSI/DALI for channels 9-12 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size

Switching Device Relay 16A nom. (165A surge)

Cable Entries Mains – 8 x 25mm dia knockout Data – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout



Rise Time 100µS at 230V


Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX 1 x programmable dry contact AUX input



Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with powder coat finish



load compatibility

options

Incandescent Neon Switched loads DSI high frequency fluorescent ballasts Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Earth leaking and overload protection on each channel -RCBO

1-10V DC high frequency fluorescent Leading edge electronic transformers Iron core transformers

DMC810GL Leading Edge/Signal Dimmer Multipurpose Controller

mounting dimensions

1-10V / DSI / DALI 1-10V / DSI / DALI 1-10V / DSI / DALI 1-10V / DSI / DALI

412


392


212 176

366

electrical diagram

CH9 0 CH10 0 CH11 0 CH12 0

AUX

D-

+VE

D+

15



DMC810GL Data Sheet Rev C April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

179

DyNet RS485

149

GND

SHIELD

µP

Integration Devices

Within any modern project, many third-party systems can be found performing different roles. Each separate system may use a different protocol for communication. To unite the efforts of these different systems, Philips Dynalite has developed a range of gateway devices that can be used to synchronise their functions together into one integrated system solution. By utilising the correct gateway, different systems can be integrated together allowing end-users to have access to a fully automated site from one interface. By successfully integrating third-party systems with Philips Dynalite, repetitive interaction from end-users is reduced. A range of different gateways have been developed to provide different integration opportunities and network management options.

DNG100BT Ethernet Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DNG100BT provides cost effective integration between Philips Dynalite control systems and Ethernet networks. It is designed to provide remote control of sites and link multiple sites together, using the Internet or a corporate LAN as a backbone. The device supports the TCP/IP protocol, with static or DHCP assigned IP addressing. Routing Mode links multiple DNG100BT’s together in point to point or broadcast modes. An integral webserver allows Browser based control scenarios. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. The DNG100BT is capable of routing DyNet to third-party systems, such as audio-visual and building automation systems, providing an integrated approach to total building control and energy management.

technical data

Supply 230V ± 14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.1A DyNet DC Supply 12V DC @ 90mA (supply for approx. 4 panels) Serial Ports 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x 10/100BaseT Ethernet port Supported Ethernet Protocols TCP/IP (TCP & UDP) HTTP FTP Telnet Encryption: AES - 256 bit Serial Port Terminals DyNet RS485: Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12V All available on screw terminals 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Also available on RJ45 socket Ethernet: Female RJ45 socket

Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 225mm x W 165mm x D 59mm Weight Packed weight 2.2kg

DNG100BT Ethernet Gateway

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

26

122

L Supply: 230V 0.1A N 1 Phase E

RS485 DyNet RJ12 SHIELD

100BaseT Ethernet RJ45

165

GND D+ µP

RS485 DyNet

125

D+VE

176 53 37

226 59

Web Server



DNG100BT Data Sheet Rev I April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DMNG100BT Ethernet Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DMNG100BT provides cost effective integration between Philips Dynalite control systems and Ethernet networks. It is designed to provide remote control of sites and link multiple sites together, using the Internet or a corporate LAN as a backbone. The device supports the TCP/IP protocol, with static or DHCP assigned IP addressing. Routing Mode links multiple DMNG100BT’s together in point to point or broadcast modes. An integral webserver allows Browser based control scenarios. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. The DMNG100BT is housed in a small stand-alone enclosure that is an ideal size for installation behind racked equipment. The device is powered from the DyNet network and does not require to be supplied by mains voltage.

technical data

Supply 15V DC supplied by the DyNet network at 200mA


Serial Ports 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x 10/100BaseT Ethernet port


RS485 Port Connections Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12V All available on screw terminals 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Also available on RJ12 socket

Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick

Ethernet Port Connections Female RJ45 socket


Supported Ethernet Protocols TCP/IP (TCP & UDP) HTTP FTP Telnet


Data Security AES - 256 bit


DMNG100BT Ethernet Gateway

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

SHIELD

RS485 DyNet Port

GND D+ D-

µP

RJ45 Ethernet Port

150mm

+VE

Web Server

30mm

80mm



DMNG100BT Data Sheet Rev E April 2011


DDNG100BT Ethernet Gateway

The Dynalite DDNG100BT provides cost effective integration between Philips Dynalite control systems and Ethernet networks. It is designed to provide remote control of sites and link multiple sites together, using the Internet or a corporate LAN as a backbone. The device supports the TCP/IP protocol, with static or DHCP assigned IP addressing. Routing Mode links multiple DDNG100BT’s together in point to point or broadcast modes. An integral webserver allows Browser based control scenarios. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. The DDNG100BT is capable of routing DyNet to third-party systems, such as audio-visual and building automation systems, providing an integrated approach to total building control and energy management.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at < 0.1A Serial Ports 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x 10/100BaseT Ethernet port Supported Ethernet Protocols TCP/IP (TCP & UDP) HTTP FTP Telnet Encryption: AES - 256 bit DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 90mA Supply Terminals Phase, Neutral 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size DNG100BT - Earth link bar provided Serial Port Terminals DyNet RS485: Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12V All available on screw terminals 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Also available on RJ12 socket Ethernet: Female RJ45 socket

Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.86kg

DDNG100BT Ethernet Gateway

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions


RS485 DyNet RJ12 SHIELD


GND D+ µP

RS485 DyNet

D+VE

Web Server



DDNG100BT Data Sheet Rev D April 2011


DAC100BT Area Controller

The Philips Dynalite DAC100BT Area Controller is a network interface that also provides a range of area management and user control functions. The DAC100BT is ideal for commercial applications incorporating a common building services 100BaseT LAN backbone. The device supports the TCP/IP protocol, with static or DHCP assigned IP addressing. Routing Mode links multiple DAC100BT’s together in point to point or broadcast modes. An integral webserver allows browser based control scenarios. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. The DAC100BT is also capable of routing DyNet to third party systems, such as audio-visual and building automation systems, providing an integrated approach to total building control and energy management. Key features include OLED panel display highlighting panel status, along with local area overrides, integrated user front panel and a range of test buttons and maintenance switch indicators. A mechanical key lock is provided for secure access.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at <0.1A Serial Ports 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x 10/100BaseT Ethernet port

User Controls Programmable Emergency Lighting Test select buttons with status indicators. Local Area Override On, Off and Fade Up, Down buttons with status indication. 4 programmable user control buttons. Panel enable/disable key switch.

Supported Ethernet Protocol TCP/IP (TCP & UDP) HTTP FTP Telnet Encryption: AES - 256 bit

Control Inputs 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 8 x multi-purpose programmable dry contact /0-5V DC analogue inputs for load shedding, alarm and emergency lighting.

DyNet DC Supply 12V@ 90mA (supply for approx. 4 panels)


Supply Terminals Phase, Neutral 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size DNG100BT - Earth link bar provided Serial Port Terminals DyNet RS485: Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12V All available on screw terminals 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Also available on RJ12 socket Ethernet: Female RJ45 socket Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status

Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 225mm x W 165mm x D 59mm Weight Packed weight 2.2kg

DAC100BT Area Controller

electrical diagram


26


RS485 DyNet RJ12

5V 0V

165

IN8

IN4

125

GND

A/D

IN7 Dry Contact IN6 & Analogue Inputs IN5

SHIELD RS485 D+ DyNet µP

D+15V

IN3 IN2 IN1

176 53 37

226 59




DAC100BT Data Sheet Rev C April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DNG232

RS232 Network Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DNG232 is designed to enable cost effective serial port integration between the Philips Dynalite control system and third-party systems such as AV systems, lighting desks, data projectors, HVAC, BMS and security systems. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. A library of data formats is available for the systems integrator to choose from or, alternatively, a format can be created using the on board conditional logic engine to assemble and transmit user-defined data strings. Macro functions are available to simplify the control of multiple devices.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at <0.1A Serial Ports 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 2 x RS232 serial ports RS485 Port Connections Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12V All available on screw terminals 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Also available on RJ12 socket

RS232 control lines

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 90mA (approx. 6 panels) User Controls Service Switch Diagnostic LED Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing

RS232 Port Connections 2 x Female DB9 connectors


RS232 Port Modes DTE, DCE, selected by jumpers

Construction Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish

RS232 Data Formats Baudrate: 600-250k Max packet length: 254 bytes Data bits: 7/8 Stop bits: 1/2 Parity: odd/even/none Flow Control: none/RTS-CTS

Dimensions H 225mm x W 165mm x D 59mm Weight Packed weight 2.2kg

Pin

Function

Implementation

1

DCD (data carrier detect)

Not connected

2

RD (received data)

Connected to UART

3

TD (transmitted data)

Connected to UART

4

DTR (data terminal ready)

Not connected

5

SG (signal ground)

Connected to Ground

6

DSR (data set ready)

Not connected

7

RTS (request to send)

Software controlled

8

CTS (clear to send)

Software controlled

9

RI (ring indicator)

Not connected

DNG232


electrical diagram


1 - DCD

L

26

S upply : 230V 0.1A 1 P hase

2 - TD

N

3 - RD

E

4 - DTR 5 - SG

165

R S 232 P ort 1

125

6 - DSR 7 - R TS 8 - C TS 9 - RI 1 - DCD 2 - TD 3 - RD

S HIELD

176

µP

D-

R S 232 P ort 2

53

5 - SG

D+

226

4 - DTR

G ND

59

R S 485 DyNet P ort

6 - DSR 7 - R TS

+VE

8 - C TS

37

DCE / DTE Selector

9 - RI



DNG232 Data Sheet Rev J April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DMNG232


The Philips Dynalite DMNG232 is designed to enable cost effective serial port integration between the Philips Dynalite control system and third-party systems such as AV systems, lighting desks, data projectors, HVAC, BMS and security systems. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. A library of data formats is available for the systems integrator to choose from or, alternatively, a format can be created using the on board conditional logic engine to assemble, transmit and receive user-defined data strings. Macro functions are available to simplify the control of multiple devices. The DMNG232 is housed in a small stand alone enclosure that is an ideal size for installation behind racked equipment. The device is powered from the DyNet network and does not require to be supplied by mains voltage.

technical data

Supply 15V DC supplied by the DyNet network at 50mA


Serial Ports 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x RS232 serial port


RS485 Port Connections Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12V All available on screw terminals 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Also available on RJ12 socket

RS232 control lines

Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick

RS232 Port Connections Female DB9 connector






Pin

Function

Implementation

1


Not connected

2

RD (received data)

Connected to UART

3


Connected to UART

4


Not connected

5

SG (signal ground)

Connected to Ground

6


Not connected

7


Software controlled

8

CTS (clear to send)

Software controlled

9

RI (ring indicator)

Not connected

DMNG232


electrical diagram

mounting dimensions 1 - DCD 2 - TD 3 - RD

SHIELD

4 - DTR

GND

5 - SG

D+ D-

µP

6 - DSR

RS232 Port

7 - RTS

+VE

8 - CTS

DCE / DTE Selector

150mm

RS485 DyNet Port

9 - RI

30mm

80mm



DMNG232 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDNG232


The Philips Dynalite DDNG232 is designed to enable cost effective serial port integration between the Philips Dynalite control system and third-party systems such as AV systems, lighting desks, data projectors, HVAC, BMS and security systems. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. A library of data formats is available for the systems integrator to choose from or, alternatively, a format can be created using the on board conditional logic engine to assemble and transmit user-defined data strings. Macro functions are available to simplify the control of multiple devices.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at <0.1A Serial Ports 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x RS232 serial port RS485 Port Connections Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12V All available on screw terminals 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Also available on RJ12 socket

User Controls Service Switch Diagnostic LED Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing

RS232 Port Connections 2 x Female DB9 connector



Construction Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)


RS232 control lines

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 90mA (approx. 6 panels)


Pin

Function

Implementation

1


Not connected

2

RD (received data)

Connected to UART

3


Connected to UART

4


Not connected

5

SG (signal ground)

Connected to Ground

6


Not connected

7


Software controlled

8

CTS (clear to send)

Software controlled

9

RI (ring indicator)

Not connected

DDNG232


electrical diagram

S upply : 230V 0.1A 1 P hase

mounting dimensions 1 - DCD

L

2 - TD

N

3 - RD

E

4 - DTR 5 - SG

R S 232 P ort 1

6 - DSR 7 - R TS 8 - C TS 9 - RI 1 - DCD 2 - TD 3 - RD

S HIELD

R S 485 DyNet P ort

4 - DTR

G ND

5 - SG

D+ D-

µP

R S 232 P ort 2

6 - DSR 7 - R TS

+VE

8 - C TS

DCE / DTE Selector

9 - RI



DDNG232 Data Sheet Rev D April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDNG485

Network Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DDNG485 is a flexible network communications gateway designed for DyNet RS485 networks. The two opto-isolated RS485 ports enable the DDNG485 to implement a trunk and spur topology on large project sites, with the device providing a high-speed backbone opto-coupled to many lower speed spurs. It also provides isolation of electrical faults to individual spurs. The device is also designed to enable cost effective integration between the Philips Dynalite control system and third-party devices. The on-board Programmable Logic Controller can assemble and transmit user-defined data strings. The DDNG485 has a DMX mode that can transmit or receive up to 64 channels of DMX512, with automatic DyNet conversion and Task triggering. This is a popular method of allowing a lighting operator temporary control of the house lights from the DMX lighting console in an auditorium scenario.

technical data

Supply 12V DC max. 375mA from the DyNet Network, fed via Port 1


Control Ports 2 x RS485 DyNet/DyNet II serial ports


Serial Port Isolation 3.75KV RMS optical isolation between ports

Construction Polycarbonate DIN Rail case (6 units wide)

User Controls Service switch Diagnostic LED


DMX Functions - DMX receive: 64 channels - DMX transmit: 64 channels Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller - 64 Tasks Serial Port Terminals Port 1: SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V, AUX 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Port 2: SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size 1 x RJ12 socket for plug in connection

topology example

To other floors DBC410

DBC410

EL1

DyNet Trunk

EL1

DDNG485 Network Gateway DDNG485

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Universal Sensor

Universal Sensor

DUS703C

DUS703C

To up to 123 more devices

DyNet Spur

DBC410

DBC410

DyNet Trunk

EL1

DDNG485 Network Gateway DDNG485

EL1

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Universal Sensor

DUS703C

DUS703C


DyNet Spur DyNet Trunk

Universal Sensor

To other floors

DDNG485 Network Gateway

DDNG485 Network Gateway

DDNG485

DDNG485

DyNet - Up to 2 Kilometers To network devices

To network devices

DDNG485

Network Gateway

electrical diagram


SHIELD

Port 1 RS485 DyNet

SHIELD

GND D+ D-

GND

µP

+VE

D+ D-

Port 2 RS485 DyNet DMX512

+VE

AUX

Port 2 RJ12 Socket

59

94.5

DC/DC

38

51

75

69 46



DDNG485 Data Sheet Rev K April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDNI485

Network Passive Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DDNI485 is designed for cost effective optical isolation of DyNet RS485 networks. The two opto-isolated RS485 ports enable the DDNI485 to implement a trunk and spur topology, with each spur being electrically isolated from the others so a fault in one section of the network will be contained. It is a “passive” device that does not require programming.

technical data

Supply 12V DC 100mA from the DyNet Network, fed via Port 1 Control Ports 2 x RS485 DyNet/DyNet II serial ports Serial Port Isolation 2.5KV surge rated optical isolation between ports

Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Polycarbonate DIN rail enclosure (6 unit)

Serial Port Terminals Port 1: SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size 1 x RJ12 socket for plug in connection


Port 2: SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size 1 x RJ12 socket for plug in connection

topology examples

To other floors DBC410

DBC410

EL1

DyNet Trunk

EL1

DDNI485 Network Isolator DDNI485

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Universal Sensor

Universal Sensor

DUS703C

DUS703C


DyNet Spur

DBC410

DBC410

DyNet Trunk

EL1

DDNI485 Network Isolator DDNI485

EL1

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Universal Sensor

DUS703C

DUS703C


DyNet Spur DyNet Trunk

Universal Sensor

To other floors

DDNI485 Network Isolator

DDNI485 Network Isolator

DDNI485

DDNI485

DyNet - Up to 2 Kilometers To network devices

To network devices

DDNI485

Network Passive Gateway

electrical diagram


S HIELD

P ort 1 R S 485 DyNet

S HIELD

G ND

G ND

D+

D+

D-

D-

+VE IN

+VE

P ort 1 R J 12 S ocke t

P ort 2 R S 485 DyNet IN

P ort 2 R J 12 S ocke t

59

94.5

DC /DC

38

51

75

69 46



DDNI485 Data Sheet Rev E April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DNG485

RS485/DMX Gateway

The Philips Dynalite DNG485 is a flexible network communications bridge designed for RS485 networks. The two opto-isolated RS485 ports enable the DNG485 to implement a trunk and spur topology on large project sites, with the bridge providing a high-speed backbone opto-coupled to many lower speed spurs. It also provides isolation of electrical faults to individual spurs and augments network security and robustness through the definition of packet filtering rules for each direction. The DNG485 is capable of routing DyNet to third-party systems, such as audio-visual and building automation systems, providing an integrated approach to total building control and energy management. The DDNG485 has a DMX mode that can transmit or receive up to 64 channels of DMX512, with automatic DyNet conversion and Task triggering.

technical data

Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at Max. 0.25A Control Ports 2 x RS485 DyNet serial ports Serial Port Isolation 3.75KV RMS optical isolation between ports User Controls Service switch Diagnostic LED

Serial Port Terminals Serial Port 1: SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Serial Port 2: SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size 1 x RJ12 socket for plug in connection Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing

Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller Packet filtering DyNet to DyNet II translation


DMX512 Support -DMX Receive: 64 channels -DMX Transmit: 64 channels DyNet DC Supply Serial Port 1: 12V @ 450mA (approx. 20 panels) Serial Port 2: 12V @ 180mA (approx. 9 panels)


Supply Terminals Phase, Neutral 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Earth link bar provided To other floors

typology examples

DNG485 Network Gateway

EL1

EL1

DyNet Trunk

1

DBC410

DBC410

DNG485

2

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Universal Sensor

Universal Sensor

DUS703C

DUS703C


DyNet Spur


Trunk/Spur

DBC410

DBC410

DyNet Trunk

EL1

EL1

DNG485

1

2

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

DNG485

DNG485

To powered network devices

2

DUS703C


To other floors Network Gateway

1

Universal Sensor

DUS703C


DyNet Spur

Buffer

Universal Sensor

DNG485

DyNet - Up to 2 Kilometers

1

2

To powered network devices

DNG485

RS485/DMX Gateway

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

75 mm

80mm

L Supply: N 230V 0.1A 1 Phase E

Port 2 RJ12 Socket SHIELD GND

GND

RS485 DyNet Port 1

225 mm

D + RS485

D+

µP

D-

D-

DyNet Port 2

165 mm

+VE

+VE

Opto Isolators



DNG485 Data Sheet Rev G April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

320mm

345 mm

365 mm

DC/DC

DTK622

Network Gateway

DTK622 network gateway provides passive integration to a PC or a RS232 system. The DTK622-232 allows for full duplex integration to RS232. Useful for linking the Philips Dynalite system with an AV or airconditioning system that supports RS232 communications. A DTK622-USB provides a useful interface between any PC and the Philips Dynalite system, The DTK622-USB allows complete access to all network messages present on DyNet. To be used in conjunction with any of the Philips Dynalite software, this tool can be used to commission, diagnose/repair with Envision Project or used as a permanent gateway to the system for the head-end software EnvisionManager.

technical data

Connectors DTK622-USB: 1 x USB type B connector 2 x RJ12 sockets (RS485 DyNet) DTK622-232: 1 x D9 Female socket (RS232) 2 x RJ12 sockets (RS485 DyNet) Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing

DTK622-USB

Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure ABS enclosure Dimensions H 25mm x W 50mm x D 90mm Weight Packed weight 0.94kg

DTK622-232

options

DyNet RS485 <-> USB gateway-USB DyNet RS485 <-> RS232 gateway-232

Supplied with DTK622-USB: 1 x USB cable, type A to type B 1 x RJ12 cable 1 x Dingus DTK622-232: 1 x 232 cable male to female connector 1 x RJ12 cable 1 x Dingus

DTK622

Network Gateway

DTK622-232

DTK622-USB

RJ12 - 6 Pole wiring BROWN: YELLOW: GREEN: RED: WHITE: DRAIN:

Not connected + 12V DD+ Ground Drain

BROWN - PIN 1 YELLOW - PIN 2 GREEN - PIN 3 RED - PIN 4 WHITE - PIN 5 DRAIN - PIN 6



DTK622 Data Sheet Rev A July 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDNI-LON

LON Gateway

The DDNI-LON is designed to provide a LON single point interface to a Philips Dynalite control system. The DDNI-LON is based on Echelon Corporation’s Neuron 3120 chip, which supports 63 SNVT’s and will support preset control of 100 presets per area for 30 areas. Multiple DDNI-LON devices can be cascaded together to accommodate larger or more complex DyNet networks. The device is configured to operate on the LON network with Echelon Corporation’s LonMaker.

technical data

Supply 12V DC @ 50mA from the DyNet network Control Ports 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x TP/FTT10A twisted pair LonWorks port User Controls DyNet Service Switch DyNet Diagnostic LED LON Service Switch LON Diagnostic LED

Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure ABS DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit) Dimensions H 86mm x W 105mm x D 70mm Weight Packed weight 0.6Kg

DDNI-LON

LON Gateway

electrical diagram


SHIELD DyNet RS485

GND D+

µP

D+VE

59

94.5

A TP/FT10 LonWorks B

38

51

75

69 46



DDNI-LON Data Sheet Rev H April 2011


DDNG-KNX

KNX Network Gateway

The DDNG-KNX allows for high level integration between the Philips Dynalite system and BMS using the KNX protocol. This gateway between the two systems allows high level communication, opening up a number of integration opportunities. When using the DDNG-KNX gateway, a projects BMS system can be used to directly trigger tasks, timed based events and the Philips Dynalite system can report back current system statuses. This allows for more flexible integration solutions.

technical data

Supply 12V DC 50mA from the DyNet Network, fed via Port 1 Control Ports 1 x RS485 DyNet/DyNet II serial ports 1 x KNX Serial Port Isolation 2.5KV surge isolation between ports User Controls Service switch DyNet & KNX Diagnostic LED DyNet & KNX Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller - 64 Tasks Serial Port Terminals Port 1: DyNet SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V, AUX 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size Port 2: KNX KNX +, KNX 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size plug

topology example

Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Polycarbonate DIN Rail case (6 units wide) Dimensions H 94.5mm x W 105mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.25kg

DDNG-KNX

KNX Network Gateway

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

94

105

69 46

75

51

38



DDNG-KNX Data Sheet Rev A July 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDNG-BACnet

BACnet Network Gateway

The DDNG-BACnet allows for high level integration between the Philips Dynalite system and BMS using the BACnet protocol. This gateway between the two systems allows high level communication, opening up a number of integration opportunities. When using the DDNG-BACnet gateway, a projects BMS system can be used to directly trigger tasks, timed based events and the Philips Dynalite system can report back current system statuses. This allows for more flexible integration solutions.

technical data

Supply 15V VDC 1A


Control Ports 1 x RS232 serial port 1 x Ethernet BACnet


Serial Port Terminals Port 1: RS232 D9 connector Female

Construction Polycarbonate DIN Rail case

Port 2: Ethernet RJ45 socket BACnet Ethernet. Port 3: Ethernet RJ45 socket Web server configuration.

options

200 BACnet addressing points -200 1000 BACnet addressing points-1000


DDNG-BACnet

BACnet Network Gateway

recommended installation

Additional Philips Dynalite devices shown are not supplied with BACnet Gateway Part number

Description

DDNP1501 DTK622-232 DPN308N

Network Power supply RS232 <-> RS485 Bidirectional Gateway Wall plate network socket

See other product data sheets for more details



DDNG-BACnet Data Sheet Rev A July 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDMIDC8

Low Level Input Integrator

The DDMIDC8 is designed to enable cost effective input integration to the Philips Dynalite control system from third-party systems such as Security, HVAC and BMS. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. Eight digital inputs are provided, each of which can be individually configured as a dry contact input or a 0-24V AC/DC input. Each input has an LED indicator to provide visual status indication, and all inputs are individually optically isolated for high noise immunity. In addition to the digital inputs, four 0-5V/0-10V (software selectable) analogue inputs are provided. The DDMIDC8 is housed in a 6 unit wide DIN enclosure for installation into switchboards and also has internal fixing points that allow the device to be fixed to a surface without the use of DIN rail. The device is powered from the DyNet network and does not require a separate mains voltage supply.

technical data

Supply 12V DC supplied by the DyNet network 37mA with all Dry Contacts open 68mA with all Dry Contacts closed Digital Inputs 8 x opto-isolated inputs, each or configurable to Dry Contact 0-24V AC/DC (Safety Extra Low Voltage only) Digital Input Isolation Optical isolation (2.5kV surge rated)

Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller Digital Input Terminals A, B for each input 1 x 2.5mm2 conductor size Analogue Input Terminals CH, GND, for each input 1 x 2.5mm2 conductor size Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing

Analogue Inputs 4 x inputs, configurable to 0-5V or 0-10V (Safety Extra Low Voltage only)


Analogue Input Impedance 20K Ohm

Enclosure Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit)

Serial Port 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port


User Controls LED status indicators for digital inputs


DDMIDC8

Low Level Input Integrator

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions Optical Isolation Barrier

Input 1

Input 2

SHIELD

94 mm

GND DyNet RS485

D+

Input 3

D+VE

Input 4

Input 5

Opto Isolated Dry Contact/0-24V AC/DC Digital Inputs

Input 6

105 mm

Input 7

µP

Input 8

A/D

CH1 GND

A/D

CH2 GND A/D

CH3

0-5V/0-10V Analogue Inputs

GND A/D

CH4 GND

69 mm 46 mm

+5V

75mm 51mm 38 mm



DDMIDC8 Data Sheet Rev M April 2011


DPMI940

Dry Contact Gateway

The DPMI940 is a four way dry contact interface designed to allow mechanical switches and relays to interface to the DyNet network. The function of each input is programmable and the small size of the product combined with the inputs being presented on flyleads makes it perfect for installation behind multi-gang switch grids. In addition to use as a simple dry contact interface, the DPMI940 has a “motion detector” mode that turns a third-party motion detector into a fully featured DyNet sensor. The flylead that connects to the motion relay and tamper switch also has a 0V and +12VDC pair for powering the motion detector from the DyNet network power supply. The small size of the DPMI940 allows it to be fitted completely inside many brands of motion detectors.

technical data

Supply 12V at 20mA, from the DyNet network


Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port


Inputs 4 x dry contact inputs DPMI940

Dry Contact Flyleads +12V, GND, GND, SW1, SW2, SW3, SW4; all presented on a 2mm pitch x 160mm long ribbon cable Serial Port Terminals SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +15V 1 x 2mm2 max conductor size Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status

Construction Bare circuit board with heatshrink cover Dimensions H 19mm x W 40mm x D 19mm Weight Packed weight 15.5 grams

DPMI940

Dry Contact Gateway

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions

SW2

Dry Contact Inputs

SW3

19 mm

SW1

SW4

40 mm side view

GND GND

µP

GND +12V

+12VDC Output

Ribbon Cable Black Trace

Ribbon Cable

19 mm

DyNet RS485

AUX +VE DD+ GND Shield

top view



DPMI940 Data Sheet Rev D April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DIR-TX8

Infra-red Transmitter

The DIR-TX8 is designed to provide cost effective integration and control of all types of infrared controllable devices, such as AV equipment. User-friendly PC software is used to program the DIR-TX8 with common IR codes from the supplied library. The DIR-TX8 also has an integral IR receiver that is used to learn and save previously unknown IR codes. Multiple IR codes can be arranged into macros and played back at any time with a single DyNet command. The device includes an internal Programmable Logic Controller and supports all Philips Dynalite script commands.

technical data

DIR-TX8

Supply 12V @ DC 50mA, supplied from DyNet network


IR Transmit Outputs 8 independent, individually controllable outputs. Connector type is 4 x 3.5mm stereo jacks which accept stereo and mono plugs.


IR Inputs 1 IR input, used for learning and saving unknown IR codes


Control Inputs 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input Internal Controls Programmable Logic Controller User Controls Service Switch Diagnostic LED IR Transmit/Learn LED

DIR-EM2 (supplied separately)

pc software

Construction ABS plastic enclosure

Weight Packed weight 0.15kg DIR-EM2 (supplied separately) 2 x separately controllable IR Emitter LEDs 2 metre lead length Terminates in 3.5mm stereo plug Adhesive mounting pads supplied

DIR-TX8

Infra-red Transmitter

electrical diagram IR Outputs 4 x 3.5mm stereo jacks

SHIELD GND

RS485 DyNet Port

IR Zone 1 (CH1A = Tip, CH1B = Ring)

D+


D-


+VE AUX

mounting dimensions


µP

150mm

IR Learner

30mm

80mm



DIR-TX8 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DDFCUC024

Fan Coil Unit Controller

The DDFCUC024 is a Fan Coil Unit controller designed for direct connection to components commonly found in airconditioning systems. Triac outputs are provided for controlling hot and chilled water valves, relay outputs for driving fan motors, a high capacity relay output is available for electrical heaters. Inputs are provided for a resistive type temperature sensor and the device can use data from a networked temperature sensor such as the Philips Dynalite DTS900. Programmable auxiliary inputs are provided for peripherals such as smoke detectors, motion detectors, window open/close sensors and airflow detectors. The device can be networked with other equipment, such as Philips Dynalite Revolution DRP wall stations and DTP160 touchscreen, via an onboard RS485 DyNet port.

technical data


Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size

Outputs 1 x dual triac 24VAC output for open/ close or floating hot water valve

Output Terminals Hot water valve: common, open, close, 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size

1 x dual triac 24VAC output for open/ close or floating chilled water valve 3 x 230VAC relay outputs for high/med/ low fan control Temperature Sensor Input 20K NTC (networked temperature sensors also supported) Dry Contact Inputs 3, programmable for devices including: - window sensor - motion detector - airflow sensor

Chilled water valve: common, open, close, 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size Fan: neutral, low, med, high 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 90% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick

Control Inputs 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port

Enclosure Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)

DyNet DC Supply 12V @ 120mA (Max. 6 panels)




DDFCUC024

Fan Coil Unit Controller

wiring diagram Shield GND +D -D +VE

mounting dimensions



DDFUCU024 Data Sheet Rev G April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

Envision Software

EnvisionProject and EnvisionManager software delivers powerful functionality, time saving and user-friendly benefits to ensure success through the life of a project. This fully integrated end-to-end solution is the next generation software, to deliver advanced lighting control commissioning and management.

DLight III Server Gateway Integration Software

DLight III Server (EnvisionManager) is designed to provide high level integration and control options to a Philips Dynalite DyNet network via a Local Area Network. The DyNet network is connected to a server PC’s COM or USB port or over Ethernet when using a DNG100BT. Information can then be exchanged via client software running on the server PC or clients connecting remotely over the Ethernet network using TCP/IP. Integration to other services is made simple via the use of a set of calls using an industry standard DCOM interface. DLight III Server accompanied by it’s main MapView client software is an inexpensive solution for providing occupants of open plan office space with control over their local environment. The MapView management software provides a sophisticated control and monitoring environment that can be tailored to the specifications of the customer. Using a multipage graphical environment, a building manager has quick and easy control and status reflection of the lighting system. The system provides status indicators of alarm events, such as device offline, circuit breaker trips and lamp failures – both visually in real-time and via reports. Diagnostic and maintenance data such as lamp burn time is also available as well as features such as Emergency Lamp Test and Notional Power reporting. TrayPan end-user client software can reside in the tool tray of desktop PC’s in the open plan office use the existing LAN to communicate with DLight III Server, provides a cost benefit over the provision of local control panels that would otherwise be required. The optional DLight III Toolbox Software Development Kit provides a rapid integration environment for connection to Building Management Systems. A set of system calls and example clients, including source code, are provided to assist with developing integration solutions and custom clients. The DLight III Server license model takes the size and scope of the Philips Dynalite system into account, making the product affordable for both large and small sized systems.

technical data

LAN Interface Ethernet - TCP/IP Server Software Interfaces DCOM DyNet Interface 1 serial interface, via USB or RS232 port Optional DNG100BT connectivity Hardware Requirements* Hardware Platform: PC Processor: Minimum 2Ghz Dual Core Hard Disk: Minimum 10Gb free space System Memory: Minimum 2GB RAM Graphics Memory: Minimum 256MB RAM Serial Ports: One free RS232 or USB port Network: Ethernet Network card 1 x Philips Dynalite PC Node adaptor We recommend the PC is powered from an Uninterruptible Power Supply

Operating Systems Supported Windows XP Professional SP3 Windows 7 SP1 Windows 2003 Server SP1 Windows 2008 Server SP2

Clients MapView - Master control GUI TrayPan virtual PC Panel Client Interfaces DLight III ToolBox SDK optionally available to assist creating custom clients and/or integration gateways Client Security Integrates with and uses Windows Domain and Workgroup Security Groups and Users. Rights configurable on a User and Group basis. Ordering Information DL3SBL Server with 10 Device/Area** Licenses DL3SUL Additional Device/Area* License DL3TB ToolBox SDK *Note: minimum requirements will vary depending on the size of the site and the number of simultaneously connected clients. Consult the DLight III Server Implementation Guide for more details. **The required Licenses are based on the quantity of networked hardware devices or the number of Areas

DLight III Server Gateway Integration Software

typical application

  



 









  



     

 













 

 

   

   

 



 

traypan operation

traypan setup options



DLight III Server Data Sheet Rev H April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

Network Devices & Commissioning Tools

To bring all the different devices together, Philips Dynalite supports a range of network devices that are useful in creating a problem free installation.

DDNP1501

Network Power Supply

The DDNP1501 is a 15V DC 1.5 Amps regulated power supply, designed to supplement the DyNet network DC supply. The switchmode design allows the device to be used with a wide range of supply voltages without the need for a manual selector setting. Normally a DyNet network is self-powered by the built-in DC supplies integrated within all mains powered devices. However, in certain applications this supply may need to be supplemented with the DDNP1501 when using peripherals with a high supply requirement, such as edge lit touchscreens. The DDNP1501 is housed in a 6 unit DIN rail mount enclosure that has a circuit breaker profile. This enables the device to be installed in all types of electrical equipment enclosures, including those with cover apertures specifically designed for circuit breakers.

technical data

Supply 100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A Output 15 Volt DC @ 1.5 Amps (@230V supply) 15 Volt DC @ 1.0 Amps (@110V supply) Electrical Design Switchmode Protection Self resetting overload protection Short circuit proof Automatic thermal shutdown Supply Terminals Line, Neutral, Earth 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Output Terminals GND, GND, +15V, +15V 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size Compliance CE, C-Tick Operating Environment 0º to 50ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Construction Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 105mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.2kg

DDNP1501

Network Power Supply

electrical diagram Supply: 100 - 240VAC 0.5 A 1 Phase

L N E


Output: 15VDC 1.5A at 230V

+15V LOOP LOOP GND SHIELD

94.5

59

38

51

75

69 46



DDNP1501 Data Sheet Rev G May 2009


DDPB22RJ12

Network Junction Box

Allowing installers to have onsite flexible networking options, the DDPB22RJ12 allows for 22 DyNet flat cables of the Philips Dynalite system, to be terminated together in one location. Acting as a junction box, the DDPB22RJ12 takes advantage of the RJ12 connection system allowing for a quick install and easy implementation of a network star topology.

technical data

Connectors 1 x 5 way screw terminal 22 x RJ12 sockets User Controls Internal Diagnostic LED for network connection

Flat network cable ordering codes: 200m Roll: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE 10m Lead: DYNET-SFLATE6-CABLE-10M 5M Lead: DYNET-SFLATE6-CABLE-5M 3M Lead: DYNET-SFLATE6-CABLE-3M

Operating Environment 0º to 40ºC ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing Compliance CE, C-Tick Enclosure Polycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit) Dimensions H 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm Weight Packed weight 0.94kg

RJ12 - 6 Pole wiring

BROWN: YELLOW: GREEN: RED: WHITE: DRAIN:

BROWN - PIN 1 YELLOW - PIN 2 GREEN - PIN 3 RED - PIN 4 WHITE - PIN 5 DRAIN - PIN 6


DDPB22RJ12

Network Junction Box

electrical diagram

mounting dimensions



DDPB22RJ12 Data Sheet Rev A July 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DyNet Data Cable 100MHz 100Ω STP 4 pair CAT5E

DyNet data cable is specifically designed for high reliability RS485 network wiring. In addition to a twisted pair for RS485 data, conductors are provided to supply DC power to network powered peripherals. Conductors are shielded for maximum data integrity. The data cable is flexible, as all conductors are stranded, which also allows for robust termination into pressure plate style terminals used on Philips Dynalite equipment. The extra thick outer jacket is mains rated for use in switchboards and enhances the robustness of the cable. The cable is supplied in 305 metre lengths.

technical data

Electrical Properties Characteristic Impedance: 100±5Ω @ 100MHz

Conductors 4 twisted pairs and shield Construction: Stranded Bare Copper 7 x Ø 0.23mm (24AWG)

DC loop resistance: Max. 190 Ω/km DC resistance imbalance: Max. 2.5%

Insulation: Polyethylene PE Ø 1.00±0.02mm

Dielectric strength between pairs: 1KV RMS/minute

Pair Identification PAIR 1: blue/white-blue PAIR 2: orange/white-orange PAIR 3: green/white-green PAIR 4: brown/white-brown

Dielectric strength conductors to screen: 2.5KV RMS/minute Capacitance: 56pF/m

Shielding Aluminium/Mylar tape, 100% coverage Draw Wire: Tinned Copper Ø 0.51mm (24AWG)

Capacitance Imbalance: Max. 3.3pF/m Velocity of Propagation: <620 nsec/100m @ 100MHzΩ

Mechanical Characteristics Outer jacket construction: PVC Thickness: 0.74±0.05mm Ø 7.3±0.20mm

Outer jacket voltage rating: 600V RMS

Outer jacket colour: Orange

Operating Environment Installation: 0°C to +50°C Operation: -20°C to +60°C

Minimum cable bending radius installed: 8 times outer cable diameter Maximum tensile load - Installation: 100 N Maximum tensile load - Installed: No stretch

Standards Compliance TIA/EIA-568B.2 Category 5E UL Verified E227171 ACA Approval N1756 Packaging Cable length: 305 metres Carton: H 425mm x W 212mm x D 425mm Weight: 15.0 Kg Order Code DYNET-STP-CABLE

electrical performance

Frequency

Attenuation, Max (dB/100M)

NEXT (dB)

PS NEXT (dB)

ELFEXT (dB)

PS ELFEXT (dB)

Return Loss (dB/100m)

1.0MHz

3.10

65

62

64

61

20.00

4.0MHz

6.10

56

53

52

49

23.00

10.0MHz

9.70

50

47

44

41

25.00

16.0MHz

12.40

47

44

40

37

25.00

20.0MHz

13.90

46

43

38

35

25.00

31.25MHz

17.60

43

40

34

31

24.30

62.5MHz

25.50

38

35

28

25

21.50

100.0MHz

33.00

35

32

24

21

20.10

DyNet Data Cable 100MHz 100Ω STP 4 pair CAT5E



DyNet Data Cable Data Sheet Rev F May 2009 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE Cable Roll and Cable Kits

Flat data cable is specifically designed for high reliability localised network wiring as found in residential applications. In addition to a conductor pair for data, conductors are provided to supply DC power to network powered peripherals. Conductors have an overall shield for maximum data integrity. The data cable is flexible, as all conductors are stranded. It is designed for rapid crimp termination into RJ12 plugs for use with Philips Dynalite products with supporting RJ12 sockets. The cable is supplied in 200 metre rolls, or in pre-terminated leads of 3, 5 and 10 metre lengths.

technical data

Stripped back cable

Conductors

Electrical Properties

5 x 26AWG 12/0.12mm

Conductor DC loop resistance: Max. 240Ω/km

Shield

Drain DC resistance: Max. 40Ω/km

Drain: Copper foil wrapped 24AWG 9/0.12mm

Operating Environment

Shield: Aluminium/polyester tape

Installation: 0°C to +50°C Operation: -20°C to +60°C

Conductor Colours

Packaging

Shield: silver 1: white 2: Red 3: Green 4: Yellow 5: Black

Cable length: 200 metres Weight: 8.0 Kg

Mechanical Characteristics

Order Codes 200m Roll: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE 10m Lead: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE-10M 5m Lead: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE-5M 3m Lead: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE-3M

Outer jacket construction: PVC DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE

Cross section Dimensions: 2.65mm x 6.95mm Outer jacket colour: Orange

BROWN: YELLOW: GREEN: RED: WHITE: DRAIN: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE-5M

BROWN - PIN 1 YELLOW - PIN 2

GREEN - PIN 3 RED - PIN 4 WHITE - PIN 5 DRAIN - PIN 6


DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE Cable Roll and Cable Kits



DyNet-SFLAT6-Cable Data Sheet Rev B May 2009 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

DPP601

Portable Programmer

The DPP601 is a portable, hand-held programmer designed for making programming changes to a Philips Dynalite system without the use of a computer. The DPP601 plugs into any point on the DyNet network and the LCD display will help guide the user step by step through the programming task. Information such as channel, area and preset scene names are automatically uploaded from the network to assist in programming. The DPP601 programmer can copy individual channel levels and preset scene values to reduce set-up time. It can be used in conjunction with standard control panels to access preset scenes that are not commonly used or that require protection from accidental selection. The DPP601 has a astronomical 365 day timer clock with Sunrise/Sunset tracking, automatic Daylight Saving adjustment and powerful macro and conditional logic functions. The timer clock interfaces with other devices over the DyNet RS485 network to automate tasks and events.

technical data

Supply 12V DC 50mA from the DyNet network


Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet serial port via an RJ12 socket.


Network Connection Method RJ11<>RJ11 patchlead (5 metre patchlead supplied)

Construction Powdercoat pressed metal body

User Controls 1 x 110 x 33 pixel rear lit LCD display 1 x 12 button LCD transport keys 1 x 12 button numeric keypad Clock Battery back up 64 tasks Memory All data stored in 100 year life EEPROM


DPP601

Portable Programmer

mounting dimensions 25mm 23mm

79mm

143mm



DPP610 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011 Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.

3. Application Guides

application guide

aged care

This application guide contains information on: q Assistive Living solutions using the Dynalite control system Integration with airconditioning



Integration with security and nurse call systems



Control of equipment such as blinds and floor heating  Control through wall mount touchscreens



Monitoring through motion sensors



The Philips Dynalite control system lends itself well to providing a safe and secure living environment for the elderly. Living facilities that incorporate this type of technology can afford the occupants much greater independence and in doing so, ease the burden on health services infrastructure. This type of accommodation is often referred to as „assistive living‟. These residences are often built in complexes where all are connected to a central monitoring office that can readily dispatch nurses or alternative health care services through a nurse call type system. The typical assistive living unit incorporates smart sensors that can monitor activity during nominated times and flag potential emergency situations much earlier. In addition to this, services such as heating and airconditioning can be easily monitored through user-friendly touchscreens. The security system can also be interfaced to the same touchscreen to alleviate the complexity associated with several dedicated control panels. Other servers such as electric blinds and curtains can also be controlled from lighting control panels to reduce the complexity and effort, in addition to allowing automated control take care of day-to-day, potentially strenuous, activities. Smoke sensors are interfaced into the Philips Dynalite system to allow early warning of potential fire hazards by illuminating egress paths. The occupants can also alert monitoring staff through nurse call controls on the touchscreen or lighting control panels. Different lighting settings can also make the unit much safer, avoiding potential accidents while moving around in the unit during the night.

typical layout

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Aged Care

Page 1 of 8

system outline All the internal lighting is dimmable and labeled from D1-D4. Lighting in the courtyard and vanity is nondimmable labeled R1 & R2. Lamp numbers per lighting group are kept low so not to over light the areas. Smaller lighting groups allow for more effective and efficient lighting design and flexible control solutions. This allows for scenes to be created by having multiple lighting groups set to different levels to suit the user‟s requirements. To facilitate the use of such a lighting plan, the DIN series of controllers lend themselves perfectly to the task. The Dynalite DIN series controllers occupy a smaller footprint require less real estate in the distribution board and have many independently controlled channels that have a low rating. In this example, the floor-heating and airconditioning are monitored by Philips Dynalite through the use of DTS900 temperature sensor (DTS1) in the living room. Every room that has floor-heating also uses a temperature sensor (for simplicity, this detail is not depicted in the diagram on the following page). The DTS900 temperature sensor can be programmed to provide temperature feedback for the area it‟s installed, to the Philips Dynalite control system. If the temperature reaches a particular set point, the sensor will automatically send a message through the Dynet network that will switch off the floor heating or airconditioning system. The same network message could also be used to trigger other events if required. The temperature trigger levels are set through the touchscreen and can be manually activated from there or from any of the control panels. In addition, a touchscreen can display the current ambient temperature of any area from the DTS900 for system feedback. Different services within the accommodation can be integrated together to achieve advanced functions. For example, the lighting control motion detector can activate and de-activate when the security system is armed and disarmed. In this scenario, the motion sensors are programmed to detect movement over defined times after the security system is disarmed by the occupant. If no movement has been detected for a certain period of time, a call is sent to a monitoring office, flagging the possibility of a medical emergency. In addition, the touchscreen and all control panels have the ability to flag the same type of alert if the nominated button is pressed longer than three seconds. The smoke sensors are interfaced to the Philips Dynalite system and will generate a similar type of alert back to the estates security in the event of fire hazard. Multiple functions can be triggered when one of the alarms is activated such as all lights are turned to full and the blinds and curtains opened. In addition, the occupants can wear a thirdparty radio frequency (RF) pendant transmitter with a panic button. The third-party RF receiver can detect this remote press (from within the unit) and communicate back through the Philips Dynalite system, the need for an alarm to be triggered to the estates security. Within the bathroom, there is a water solenoid that prevents water overflow or the likelihood of water scalding if it‟s been accidentally left on. The third-party water level and temperature sensor provides feedback to the Philips Dynalite control system so that it can turn off the water valve (R12) and triggers an audible alarm so the occupant knows that the water temperature maybe too hot (or cold). Page 2 of 8


The Philips Dynalite touchscreen allows occupants to trigger the security system and can display predefined messages from the monitoring office such as “RECREATION EVENTS ON MONDAY”. Several PANIC buttons are configured on the lighting control panels, in addition to the RF pendant worn by each occupant. When these buttons are pressed, the PANIC alarm alerts the monitoring office in addition to illuminating all the lights in the unit. Furthermore, all the electrical appliances are switched off to prevent the possibility of electrical fires.

the equipment

the system in operation The lighting control panels mounted in each of the areas in the unit provide control for the lighting groups and other related equipment in each immediate area.

The touchscreens are capable of

controlling every area around the home from the one location. A DDNP1501 network power supply can be used to supplement the network, as user interface requires power that supplied to the network by the load controllers could be exceeded, due to the presence of the Philips Dynalite touchscreen.


Page 3 of 8

All blinds are connected to the DDRC810DT-GL in the following manner.

M Neutral Down Up

Earth

Up Down 240V Control Supply

240V Motor Supply

Twin & Earth

C

Step Down TRX

N/O N/C

C

N/O N/C

Relay Coils Micro Processor

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 N/O

N/O

C

C

N/C

SHLD GND D+ D+15v AUX

N/C

Any of the lighting control panels can be programmed to drive individual blinds or groups of blinds either up or down from a single button press. Floor heating is controlled by connecting the power directly to the output of the DDRC820FR due to the high currents associated with these appliances. The Philips Dynalite system can then activate the floor heating elements at programmed times. When the floor-heating element is active the temperature is then monitored by the DTS900. This equipment is connected in the following way.

The water valves are connected to the DDRC810DT-GL in addition to feedback from the third party water level sensor through the AUX input of this same device. The sensor used in this installation provides a contact closure upon detecting pre-defined water levels.

Page 4 of 8


The third-party water temperature sensor is connected to another DDMC802‟s AUX input and is also programmed to control the water valve in the same way as above. As all the devices are connected to the same network, features can be triggered from any of the controllers. A security system can be interfaced to Philips Dynalite through a dry contact closure to trigger the required response from the lighting control system. Upon the ALARM or PANIC event, the security system provides the Philips Dynalite system with a contact closure via one of the AUX inputs as described above. This action then flags this event to the monitoring station and turns on all of the lights in the unit if required.


Page 5 of 8

This same activity can be also be triggered from a lighting control panel that incorporates a programmed PANIC button. This button can be programmed so that it must be pressed for at least three seconds to avoid inadvertent or accidental triggers. When activated it signals the duress alarm to the security system and/or the nurse call system by breaking the normally closed dry contact input, as shown above. The Philips Dynalite touchscreen can control all the equipment connected to the Philips Dynalite system. It does this by displaying simple pages of controls to the homeowner as shown below. The Philips Dynalite lighting control panels throughout the unit are programmed to do more than activate lights On and Off. Panels in main living areas such as the living/family room have the ability to control blinds and the Nurse Call system. A typical display on the touchscreen is as follows.

The first button on this panel dims the lights in the room up and down. By pressing and holding the button, this will cause the lights within the area to dim up or down. The Blinds button will operate the blinds in that room in a Lights Blinds

sequence of presses. The first press will raise the blinds, the second press will stop the blinds and the third press will lower the blinds, in that order. The PANIC button flags a call both to the Nurse Call system and security system simultaneously. The Balcony button activates the lights on the

PANIC Balcony

balcony. All button functions are completely configurable to suit the required needs of the facility. load controllers One of the controllers used in this example project is the DDMC802GL. This

channels of this unit can be individually fitted with a range of different module types to suit the control requirements. The following table details the different control modules used. This load schedule also outlines all the devices found in the distribution board.

Page 6 of 8


The DDMC802 mixed controller is used for dimming the lamps within the unit. One controller (Box 1) has been fitted with a four-channel relay module (LSRM402 4 x 2A) and a four-channel leading edge dimming module (LSDM402 4 x 2A). Further dimming controllers could be fitted with 2 x LSDM402 modules if there was a requirement for more control channels. The DDRC810DT-GL is used to switch Extra Low Voltage (ELV) loads such as the water valve solenoid that‟s usually powered by a 24VDC power supply. ELV loads must never be switched on this same device when switching 240VAC loads. The DDRC820FR unit is a relay device used to switch the heavy control loads such a floor heating.

load schedule Load Controller

Cct Capacity

Drawing Designator

Fixture

Qty

Load

DDMC802 Box 1 C1

240W

D1

LV Downlight 50W

3

150W*

DDMC802 Box 1 C2

240W

D2

LV Downlight 50W

4

200W

DDMC802 Box 1 C3 DDMC802 Box 1 C4

240W

D3

LV Downlight 50W

4

200W

240W

D4

LV Downlight 50W

2

100W

DDMC802 Box 1 C5

240W

R1

T5 Linear fluorescent 18W

1

18W

DDMC802 Box 1 C6

240W

R2

Incandescent uplight 50W

1

50W

DDMC802 Box 1 C7

240W

DDMC802 Box 1 C8

240W

DDRC810DT Box 2 C1

240W

R3

Blind motor

1

500W

DDRC810DT Box 2 C2

240W

R4

Blind motor

1

500W

DDRC810DT Box 2 C3

240W

R5

Blind motor

1

500W

DDRC810DT Box 2 C4

240W

R6

Blind motor

1

500W

DDRC810DT Box 2 C5

240W

R7

Blind motor

1

500W

DDRC810DT Box 2 C6

240W

R8

Blind motor

1

500W

DDRC810DT Box 2 C7

240W

DDRC810DT Box 2 C8

240W

DDRC810DT Box 3 C1

2400W

R12

ELV water solenoid

1

500W

DDRC810DT Box 3 C2

2400W

Air Conditioning

ELV Dry contact

1

500W

DDRC810DT Box 3 C3

2400W

DDRC810DT Box 3 C4

2400W

DDRC810DT Box 3 C5

2400W

DDRC810DT Box 3 C6

2400W

DDRC810DT Box 3 C7

2400W

DDRC810DT Box 3 C8

2400W

DDRC820FR Box 4 C1

4800W

R9

Floor heating

1

4800W

DDRC820FR Box 4 C2

4800W

R10

Floor heating

1

4800W

DDRC820FR Box 4 C3

4800W

R11

Floor heating

1

4800W

DDRC820FR Box 4 C4

4800W

DDRC820FR Box 4 C5

4800W

DDRC820FR Box 4 C6

4800W


Page 7 of 8

*The maximum load current for any DDMC802 output is 2A. Each controller base/motherboard the total load current should not exceed 10A and it is strongly recommended that each such controller be protected with its own dedicated circuit breaker.

 2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet, DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.

Page 8 of 8


application guide apartment This application guide contains information on: Designing a lighting control system for a residence within a multi-dwelling environment  Basic lighting control functionality  Integration with access control  Considerations for common area lighting



From an aesthetic and lifestyle perspective, lighting control allows the homeowner to present their residence in the best possible light, creating a scene to suit any occasion; from intimate late-night dining, celebratory drinks with friends, to quietly reading a book on a rainy Sunday afternoon – no two moods are the same. A lighting control system can produce advantage on a practical & environmental level, one of the major features that can be built into a lighting control system for residential application is that lights can be automatically set to dimmed when turned on to 95% rather than 100% without any discernable difference to the human eye. The immediate benefit is a significant saving from extending the lamp life from two to three times. This document describes basic lighting control system design for an apartment in a multi-dwelling development. It also incorporates general notes on integration with a keyless access system and lighting in the common areas of the building. For further information on home automation or to learn more about integration with other services in a residential environment, see Philips Dynalite Application Design Guide – The Luxury Home.

typical layout

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Apartment

Page 1 of 5

system outline All of the main areas of the apartment; living, dining, master bed and bathroom, have dimmed lighting circuits.

Light fittings within each of the lighting groups are low, as smaller groups allow for more

effective and efficient lighting design to create the perfect scene. In addition to dimming in the main living areas, on/off controlled lighting is applied in utility areas such as the laundry. The bathroom exhaust fan shares a circuit with a linear fluorescent fitting, ensuring it does not remain on when lighting has been turned off and the bathroom unoccupied. A basic design with small lighting loads is particularly well suited to the use of the economical Philips Dynalite DIN series controllers, which occupy a smaller footprint than traditional wall-mounted dimmers. This series of dimmers is designed for installation into a switchboard, next to the circuit breaker that is supplying power to the controlled lighting circuit. Lighting control panels are positioned in convenient locations throughout the apartment, providing the occupant with many different options to change and adjust the control system. Each can be fitted with an infrared receiver, which allows the use of hand-held remote controls to activate any of the stored presets, removing the need for physical contact with the panel. In the common areas outside the apartment, hallway lighting is being controlled via motion sensors located adjacent to the elevator and fire exit on each level of the building. The access control system is integrated to both the common area lighting and the individual apartment lighting control system, meaning local apartment settings can be altered even before the occupant reaches the front door. Simply accessing the building‟s elevator or even the main entry of the apartment complex can trigger the lighting within the apartment itself.

the equipment

Page 2 of 5


the system in operation control panels Lighting control panels located around the apartment generally provide local control of lighting groups in the immediate area. Buttons can be programmed to execute „one-touch press and hold‟ for fading the light level or toggle functionality, for „ON‟ to „OFF‟. The building‟s access control system is connected to the lighting control system in the apartment via the auxiliary (AUX) input in one of the load controllers. It places the apartment into a „WELCOME‟ setting when activated which, at its most basic level, would typically switch on the apartments entry lighting, allowing the owner to return to the apartment safely and to create an inviting environment. Once inside, using the “WELCOME” mode from a pushbutton panel can be used for setting entry, kitchen & dining levels to 70% and master bedroom & living to 80%, for example. This panel typically performs control functions for immediate areas and features custom engraving detail to clearly identify each button function. In addition to the „Welcome‟ setting, some examples of illustrated functionality on CP6; ALL ON

All lights in the area come on to full, providing total illumination when required, including in times of duress or emergency.

AWAY

All lights are dimmed to „off‟ over 10 minutes.

Subsequently, a

ENTRY

ALL ON

MEDIA

DINING

KITCHEN

LIVING

HALL

BALCONY

WELCOME

AWAY

random sequence of varying light levels is activated in the living areas of the house, giving the illusion of occupancy & providing a

CP6

preventative security measure when the house is unoccupied. Lighting control panels CP1 and CP2 (left) are located bedside in the master bedroom and provide the user with global control functions.

For instance, the

LAMP

„GOODNIGHT‟ preset could turn off all house lights over a period of one or two

LIGHTS

minutes, ensuring that no lights are left on overnight, while giving other members

PATH

BALCONY

GOODNIGHT

of the house time to get to bed before lights reach 0%.

The „PATH‟ preset

illuminates a pathway from bedroom to bathroom that varies depending on the time of day from the use of a network timer clock. For example, when this preset is used between 10pm and 6am, ceiling lights in the bathroom turn on to 40% ensuring that a late-night visit to the bathroom, does not disrupt sleeping members of the

CP1-CP2

household. At all other times, both ceiling and vanity lights are turned on to 90% and

100% respectively, providing near-full illuminance for clear visibility. Lighting control panels in the remaining areas around the apartment are similarly configured to provide both ambiance and functionality. For example, in the toddler‟s bedroom, a button is programmed to dim lights down to „off‟ over a one-hour period. This is achieved with a staggered approach; first dimming Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Apartment

Page 3 of 5

the lights in the bedroom down to 40% over two seconds, then to 20% over 20 minutes and finally to off, over the remaining 40 minutes.

load controllers Apartment-wide lighting control in this scenario is achieved using 2 x DDMC802 Multipurpose Controllers. These controllers allows for each of the channels to be fitted with different styles of module control to suit the requirement of the user and their apartment. The first (Box #1), contains two 4 x 2A dimming module cards (LSDM402), for control of the low voltage incandescent fittings contained throughout the living areas. The second DDMC802 (Box #2) has been fitted with a 4 x 2A relay module card (LSRM402) for switched on/off control of lighting in utility areas; bathroom, laundry and courtyard. A vacant slot in Box #2 has been allowed for future requirement, provisioning for an additional four channels of dimming, relay or fan control at a later stage, should the homeowner desire. Integration with the building access control system is easily achieved through a dry contact output connected to the

AUX

input of any Philips Dynalite controller; in this case, either of the two DDMC802

Multipurpose Controllers being employed. By adding a network timer clock DDTC001, can provide timebased event control such as programming bedroom lights to turn on at 7:00am each day, Monday through to Friday. The DDNP1501 Network Power Supply (Box#3) is used to supplement power being provided to the network by the load controllers (about 50mA per DDMC802) for the user interface such as pushbutton panels and timer clocks. It is commonly used in situations where there are only a few load controllers with many control panels required.


Cct Capacity

Drawing Designator

Fixture

Qty

Load

DDMC802 Box 1 Ch1 DDMC802 Box 1 Ch2

240W* 240W

D1 D2

LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W

5 4

250W 200W

DDMC802 Box 1 Ch3 DDMC802 Box 1 Ch4 DDMC802 Box 1 Ch5

240W 240W 240W

D3 D4 D5

LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W

1 3 1

50W 150W 50W

DDMC802 Box 1 Ch6 DDMC802 Box 1 Ch7

240W

D6

LV Downlight 50W

2

100W

240W

D7

LV Downlight 50W

4

200W

DDMC802 Box 1 Ch8

240W

D8

LV Downlight 50W

4

200W

DDMC802 Box 2 Ch1

240W

R1

Incandescent 60W

1

60W

DDMC802 Box 2 Ch2

240W

R2

Linear fluorescent 18W T5

1

18W

DDMC802 Box 2 Ch3

240W

R3

CFL 15W

1

15W

DDMC802 Box 2 Ch4

240W

Page 4 of 5

Future capacity Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Apartment

DDMC802 Box 2 Ch5 DDMC802 Box 2 Ch6 DDMC802 Box 2 Ch7

Future expansion slot for further plug-in module

DDMC802 Box 2 Ch8

*The maximum load current for any one DDMC802 output is 2A. Each plug-in module, such as the LSDM402, should never exceed a 5A total load. Where 2 x LSDM402 modules are used with a DDMC802 controller base/motherboard, the total load current should not exceed 10A. It is strongly recommended that each such controller be protected with a dedicated circuit breaker.



Page 5 of 5

application guide boardroom This application guide contains information on: q Control of workspace and decorative lighting



Control of a data projector via RS232



Control of audio-visual equipment via infrared (IR)



Control of a projection screen



Control of window curtains



Infrared (IR) remote control



Integration with a room booking calendar via the office Ethernet LAN



The boardroom is often the centrepiece of a workplace, communicating an overall image of the company.

During corporate presentations, precisely co-ordinated control of lighting, audio-visual

systems and other devices, such as motorised blinds and curtains, is vital. Boardrooms and meeting rooms are often used for corporate hospitality, so it is desirable for a control system to accommodate entertaining.

typical layout CP1

Circuit 1

M1

CP2

Circuit 3 CP3 Circuit 7

Circuit 2 M6

M2

S1

S2

Circuit 5

Circuit 6

LEGEND Incandescent Lamp Bi-directional Motor

Circuit 4 Cold Cathode Neon CP3

User Control Panel

S2


Circuit 8 M3

M4

M5

system outline The boardroom includes a cabinet that houses audio-visual equipment. A ceiling-mounted data projector casts images on to a motorised screen, which is retracted when not in use to provide access to a whiteboard.

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Boardroom

Page 1 of 4

Within the area, different lighting groups are used individually or collectively to achieve certain scenes that best suit the current use of the boardroom. Lighting over the audio-visual cabinet (circuit 1) and the boardroom table (circuits 5 & 6) comprises narrow beam low voltage downlights, which enables precise illumination over work areas. Downlights (circuits 2 & 3) are also used for general room lighting (circuits 2 & 3) and cold cathode neon, concealed in a ceiling coffer, provides perimeter lighting around the table (circuit 4).

Separate control of circuit 2 allows fittings near the screen to be dimmed when the

projector is being used. Control panels are located adjacent to the entry doors (CP1 & CP2) and to the left of the whiteboard (CP3). An infrared remote provides control for those seated at the boardroom table. Ceiling mounted sensors (S1 & S2) pick up signals from the IR remote. Each of the five windows is fitted with motorised curtain track to reduce natural light levels during projector operation. Two control channels are used per curtain; one for direction of travel and the other for motion. This enables partial closure of the curtains and de-energises the motors at the end of travel so that motor limit switches are not relied upon constantly. The figure below illustrates the motor control circuit. CH1 L

CH2

UP DOWN

M

N

the equipment

Page 2 of 4

Philips Dynalite Application Guide - Boardroom

the system in operation control panels CP1 and CP2 are located next to the entry doors and provide control over lighting and curtains. CP3 is located to the left of the whiteboard and has the same functionality as CP1 and CP2, with an additional eight buttons for controlling the audio-visual system. Meeting members seated at the table use an IR remote for control of lighting and other devices, as does the standing presenter.

sensors Philips Dynalite DUS804C 360° universal sensors incorporate motion detect, infrared receiver and natural light level detection capability (in this application the light level function would not be used). The motion detect function is used to turn lighting off after a predetermined period of no activity, ensuring that lights are not left on unnecessarily in an empty room and to notify the building management system (BMS) that the room is no longer occupied. The IR receive function can be used to recall preset scenes by a roving presenter with the hand-held remote.

gateways to other systems AV equipment Many popular AV system vendors have developed software integration tools that enable direct network integration to the Dynalite system. Connection to the DyNet network is generally achieved using a DTK622 connected to an RS232 port on the AV system. This support enables control objects within the AV system, such as buttons and sliders, to be configured so they directly control and monitor functions within the Philips Dynalite system. This also allows command to be sent from the AV system to the lighting control system if required. Where direct control of AV equipment is required from the Philips Dynalite system, integration to audiovisual equipment can be implemented using a DIRTX8 Infrared Transmitter. This is a convenient and cost effective method of integration, as most commercial and domestic AV products are supplied with an IR port. The DIRTX8 has eight outputs, more than meeting the requirements of a typical application. It is capable of replaying ‘macros’ of IR commands with appropriate delays and conditional logic in between each step of the macro. In addition to the supplied library of IR commands, the DIRTX8 has an inbuilt learner to record IR commands.

data projector Control of the data projector is implemented using a DMNG232 Network Gateway configured to ASCII mode. This allows bi-directional communication with the projector using text, via an RS232 port. Other methods of interfacing include using a DIRTX8 infrared transmitter for projectors that are IR enabled.

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Boardroom

Page 3 of 4

LAN services EnvisionManager provides a DCOM integration platform that enables connectivity over TCP/IP across an office or commercial LAN. With this approach the Philips Dynalite system can be readily controlled from any PC installed on the LAN, using intranet web pages, or a range of software utilities available from Philips Dynalite. It also enables popular applications from Microsoft and many other software vendors to directly control the system. An example may involve a reservation system within Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes that sets a boardroom into an appropriate mode prior to a scheduled meeting.

load controllers Two DLE405 4 x 5A dimmers provide eight channels of leading edge dimming for downlights and cold cathode neon. Control of curtain motors and the projection screen is achieved using two DRC810DT-GL 8 x 10A relay controllers.

The DRC810DT-GL employs dry contact changeover outputs, which are

particularly suitable for control of curtain motors.


Cct Capacity

Drawing Designator

Fixture

Qty

Load

DLE405 Box 1 C1 DLE405 Box 1 C2 DLE405 Box 1 C3 DLE405 Box 1 C4 DLE405 Box 2 C1 DLE405 Box 2 C2 DLE405 Box 2 C3 DLE405 Box 2 C4 DRC810DT Box 3 C1 DRC810DT Box 3 C2 DRC810DT Box 3 C3 DRC810DT Box 3 C4 DRC810DT Box 3 C5 DRC810DT Box 3 C6 DRC810DT Box 3 C7 DRC810DT Box 3 C8 DRC810DT Box 4 C1 DRC810DT Box 4 C2 DRC810DT Box 4 C3 DRC810DT Box 4 C4 DRC810DT Box 4 C5 DRC810DT Box 4 C6 DRC810DT Box 4 C7

1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W

Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit M1 M1 M2 M2 M3 M3 M4 M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 Spare Spare Spare

LV Downlight 50W Downlight 100W Downlight 100W Cold Cathode Neon LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W Downlight 100W Downlight 100W M1 curtain movement M1 curtain direction M2 curtain movement M2 curtain direction M3 curtain movement M3 curtain direction M4 curtain movement M4 curtain direction M5 curtain movement M5 curtain direction M6 curtain movement M6 curtain direction

3 3 5 1 11 3 3 5 1

150W 300W 500W 600W 550W 150W 300W 500W 25W

1

25W

1

25W

1

25W

1

25W

1

25W

DRC810DT Box 4 C8

2400W

Spare

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

 2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet, DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.  Microsoft Outlook is the registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.  Lotus Notes is the registered trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.

Page 4 of 4

Philips Dynalite Application Guide - Boardroom

application guide hotel ballroom This application guide contains information on: q DMX512 control of lighting in addition to ‘in-house’ control  Automatic room join functions when a space is changed by movable walls



Providing a locking mechanism for control panels in public spaces



The appearance of the ballroom is a major selling feature of a hotel. The lighting control system should present the room in the best possible light. A ballroom generally accommodates a variety of operating modes and hotel staff need to be able to quickly and easily reconfigure the room between functions, to meet the differing needs of each client. To achieve this aim, the lighting designer would set up the preset scenes for all likely applications and room combinations in advance. Occasionally, stage sets, catwalks and other temporary equipment will be erected in the space, often positioned in front of lighting control points, which makes it imperative to provide duplicate control points in several locations and ‘smart’ sockets for portable control stations. The control system must be flexible enough to allow third-party access for DMX512 theatrical control signals.

For this to be

practical, the system must support ‘locking out’ of DMX control of emergency exits and other critical areas. As well as the requirement for flexibility and repeatability of lighting settings, the room must be as energy-efficient as possible when not in use. To effectively render the colours in the room, decorative light fittings and chandeliers typically utilise energy-hungry incandescent lamps. These have a short life span and are often difficult to access, but are necessary to create the atmosphere that guests expect. The control system should restrict use of expensive-to-operate lamps during times when only hotel staff is present and use of expensive ‘public’ lighting should only be permitted by authorised persons.

typical layout CP3

CP1

Pre Function Room CP2 TS1

TS3

TS2

Removable Wall

Removable Wall

Room A

CP4

DMX1

Room B

SW1

DMX2

CP5

Room C

SW2

DMX3

CP6

Service Corridor

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Hotel Ballroom

Page 1 of 4

system outline room joining The ballroom has a pre-function area and two removable walls, which partition the main area into any one of four combinations;



All partitions open: A + B + C



All partitions closed: A | B| C



Zone A as an area with B + C as a second area



Zone C as an area with A + B as a second area

For each of these four combinations, there may be several room ‘modes of operation’. Examples could be ‘cocktail party’, ‘banquet’, ‘AV presentation’ and ‘dinner dance’. A preset such as ‘All On’ will vary dramatically from one mode to another. For example, wall washers illuminating removable walls in one setting would be a source of glare in another where the walls were removed. As a result, allowing for as few as eight presets per combination, per mode, there is a requirement for over one hundred presets.

The system has automatic room join functions in the form of magnetic proximity switches mounted on de-mountable partition tracks. These switches are connected to a dry contact interface unit (Dynalite DDMIDC8) that automatically detects the presence or absence of removable walls.

This unit then

configures the local control panels and the set of presets they use to suit the current status. This means that with all of the partitions closed, each control panel would only control the lighting within that space and if a partition were to be opened between two rooms, each of the local control panels would work in parallel and control all of the lighting within the enlarged space. Similarly, if all partitions were open, all control panels would work in parallel and control all of the lighting. Provision is made to override the automatic partition status, which can be useful if one of the partitions is only partially in place, such as when a buffet area is required during a conference.

DMX512 control The casual use of theatrical lighting desks is enabled through the provision of dual port load controllers. This allows a separate control network for DMX512 signals, while still allowing the use of the main control system. The touchscreens provided have a password protected section that allows the selection of the circuits for which DMX512 control is allowed. It is also possible to only allow partial control of a circuit via DMX512, in the form of setting a ‘low limit’, which is useful for allowing partial control of critical circuits such as egress lighting, but never allowing these circuits to be switched off or be dimmed to an unacceptably low level.

Page 2 of 4


the equipment 3 Phase 40 AMP

3 Phase 40 AMP

3 Phase 40 AMP

DLE1210

DLE1210

3 Phase 40 AMP

DLE1210

DMX Input Room A

DLE1210

DMX Input Room B DMX512 Output

To other Load Controllers as required





DMX512 Patch Panel

DMX Input Room C

DyNet

DyNet

DyNet

DMX512

DMX512

DMX512 SW1

CP1

CP2

CP3

CP4

CP5

CP6

TS1

Unlock

Unlock

Unlock

Unlock

Unlock

Unlock

Lock

Lock

Lock

Lock

Lock

Lock

TS2

SW2

TS3

DDMIDC8 Network

Network

Network

Network

Network

Network

the system in operation control panels CP1-CP6 provide preset recall buttons, as well as some additional features. A key-switch allows the panel to be ‘locked out’, to prevent unauthorised use. This is particularly important in a ballroom environment, where correct placement of control panels often dictates that they will be in locations accessible to the public. The control panels may also be remotely locked or unlocked via a utility page on the touchscreens.

A network socket is

Unlock

1

OFF Lock

2 3 4

CLEANER

Network

CP1-CP6

included on each panel to allow easy connection of portable control panels and hand-held programming units.

load controllers The types and quantities of load controller required will vary substantially, depending on the size of the ballroom and types of loads. Because of this, only a small example of load controllers has been included in the system drawing. An important feature of the specified load controllers is that they incorporate two serial ports, one for carrying the DyNet signal and the other for connection to a separate DMX512 network. The DyNet network can be used to provide ‘on-the-fly’ configuration of DMX features, via a DMX utility page on the touchscreen.


Page 3 of 4

touchscreens TS1-TS3 provide preset recall options similar to other control panels, as well as other control and set-up options including;

      

Manual control of each circuit using an on-screen fader Reprogram the presets that are recalled from the other control panels Remotely lock and unlock the other control panels Set DMX control options Override the state of the automatic room join system Operate the lighting in other rooms, as well as it’s own room Set timed events

Sample touch screen pages – incorporate logos, set security levels, preset control, scene editing, room join and lockout features


Page 4 of 4


application guide lecture theatre This application guide contains information on: Control of workspace and presentation lighting



Control of a data projector via RS232



Control of audio equipment via infrared (IR)



Integration with a building management system (BMS) using the LON protocol  Occupancy sensing  Infrared (IR) remote control



In a lecture theatre, a flexible control system is an essential part of the lighting. Lecture theatres need to accommodate a wide range of uses and as a result, the demands on the lighting control system in this type of application are surprisingly complex. The control system must maintain the most comfortable lighting levels for a wide range of tasks, adapt to a number of room combinations, provide for safe egress in case of an emergency, interface with other systems such as AV and BMS and of course, maintain the aesthetics of the room and present the best possible appearance at all times. Users often leave lights on when vacating the space, so it is desirable for the control system to turn off lighting when the room is unoccupied. In a university or similar environment, there is often a BMS responsible for access control and HVAC. To optimise running cost and reduce energy consumption, the lighting control system should notify the BMS if the room is not in use and the airconditioning not required.

typical layout CP6

CP5

Circuit 7

Circuit 8

Circuit 8 Circuits 10, 11, 12

Circuit 1

S2

S1

S3

TS1 Circuit 9

Circuit 2 Circuit 6

LEGEND Incandescent LV

CP2 S5

S4

S6

Track Lighting

TS2 Fluorescent Luminaire

CP1

Circuit 8 CP3

Circuit 3

Circuit 4 Circuit 7

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Lecture Theatre

Circuit 5

TS1

Touch Screen

CP2

Control Panel

Circuit 8 CP4

Page 1 of 5

system outline The lecture theatre would typically incorporate a projection room where data, video and other audiovisual equipment would be housed. The lighting within the projection room (circuits 1 & 2) comprises narrow beam downlights, which prevents distracting light spills into the lecture theatre during presentations. Within the body of the lecture theatre, the primary lighting would be provided by recessed fluorescent luminaires (circuits 3, 4 & 5) fitted with electronic dimmable ballasts. There are a number of types of dimmable ballasts including 2-Wire, 1-10V, DSI & DALI. Philips Dynalite controllers support all of these control methods. In this case, DSI ballasts are used, as the individual control capability of DALI ballasts is not needed.

Control of the fluorescent luminaires is divided into three circuits to cater for the

theatre being occupied by varying group sizes and to allow for delivery of even levels of light to the seating if the ceiling is raked. There are a number of incandescent low voltage circuits in this design; downlights (circuits 6, 7 & 8) provide safe lighting levels for walkways and doorways. Separate control of the podium area downlights (circuit 9) allows for either AV projections or whiteboard presentations. Track spotlights (circuits 10, 11 & 12) allow for tightly controlled lighting of the presenter at a variety of lectern positions. Sensors (S1-S6) are placed over podium and seating areas to receive signals from a hand-held infrared remote control and to notify the control system when the space is unoccupied.

the equipment

Page 2 of 5


the system in operation lectern touchscreens The lectern touchscreens allow complete control of the system. The panel allows selection of the preset lighting scenes, which have been programmed using CP2, as well as individual control of each circuit. The system will be configured to ‘know’ which of the lectern positions is in use and dim up the appropriate channel of track lighting. The touchscreen’s main menu allows navigation to three sections; Lighting, Audio & Video, as well as preset scenes that provide operation of all three services from a single action, eg a ‘play DVD’ button would simultaneously; dim the lighting, turn on the projector and select the DVD player as the source, configure the audio routing system to use the DVD player as the source and select the main speakers at the front of the room at a default volume level and play the currently loaded DVD.

Sample Touchscreen Pages

control panels CP1 is located next to the door in the projection room and controls the lighting within the room. It selects the various preset levels needed for both set-up and operation of the room.

‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ keys allow fine adjustment.

additional button manually selects ‘ALL

OFF’,

An

which switches all lights off in the

HIGH

MED

control room and in the lecture theatre, as well as triggering a transmission to

LOW

ALL OFF

the BMS, which indicates that the room is no longer in use. A panic reset button

OFF

PANIC RESET

resets the panic condition on CP3-CP6. CP1


Page 3 of 5

CP2 is located in the projection room and controls the lighting in the lecture theatre. 1

It

2

includes

manual

slider

controls

and

provides one of the various methods by which

3 4

preset scenes can be programmed in Philips

MANUAL

Dynalite systems, having the ability to both CP2

program and recall presets.

The preset

scenes are recalled from TS1 and TS2 touchscreens at the two lectern positions in the front of the room. This panel includes a manual slider fader for each lighting circuit. This type of panel provides a very simple method for non-technical users to set up lighting presets. The slider faders also provide for ‘live’ adjustment of individual circuits. To program a preset, the operator first presses the ‘MANUAL’ button, adjusts the slider faders until the desired lighting settings are achieved and the presses and holds down the preset button to which the new settings are to be saved. Philips Dynalite call this programming method ‘hold-down programming’. Alternative methods for programming presets include PC software, LCD touchscreens, pushbutton programming panels and plug-in portable programmers. CP3-CP6 are installed adjacent to lecture theatre doors. They have two buttons, one to select the ‘ON’ preset and the other to select the ‘OFF’ preset. From these control panels, the

ON

scene would have a

Emergency

relatively fast fade time, say three seconds. However, the fade time

ON

for the

OFF

OFF

scene would be in the region of 15-20 seconds, ensuring that

Use Only

the person operating the control panel has adequate time to leave the room before the lighting fades out. All four of these control panels would work in parallel and all would include panic switches. To reset

CP3-CP6

the panic condition, a ‘RESET PANIC’ switch is provided on CP1.

sensors Dynalite DUS804C 360° universal sensors incorporate motion detect, infrared receiver and PE cell capability (in this application the PE function would not be used). The motion detect function is used to turn lighting off after a predetermined period of no activity, ensuring that lights are not left on unnecessarily and to notify the BMS that the room is no longer occupied. The IR receive function is used to recall preset scenes by a roving presenter with the hand-held remote.

gateways to other systems data projector Control of the data projector is implemented using a DNG232 Network Gateway configured to ASCII mode. This allows bi-directional communication with the projector using text, via an RS232 port. Other methods of interfacing include using a DIRTX8 infrared transmitter for projectors that are IR enabled.

Page 4 of 5


audio controller Integration to audio equipment is implemented using a DIRTX8 Infrared Transmitter. This is a convenient and cost effective method of integration as most commercial and domestic AV products are supplied with an IR port.

The DIRTX8 has eight outputs, more than meeting the requirements of a typical

application. It is capable of replaying ‘macros’ of IR commands with appropriate delays and conditional logic in between each step of the macro. In addition to the supplied library of IR commands, the DIRTX8 has an inbuilt learner to record IR commands. Other methods of interfacing with audio controllers include using a DNG232 Network Gateway for equipment that has an RS232 port.

Some AV controllers have an RS485 port, which allows direct

connection to the Philips Dynalite RS485 network. Most leading AV control systems include libraries that enable control of Philips Dynalite systems.

building management system Integration with the BMS is achieved with the DDNI-LON Network Interface. This device translates Philips Dynalite’s DyNet protocol to LON protocol, using the standard lighting SNVTs (standard network variable type). Whenever the door entry panels are used to switch the lights on, or the motion sensors detect motion or any absence of motion, the DDNI-LON notifies the BMS, which in turn sets the airconditioning to the appropriate state. There are several other common methods of interfacing with a BMS, ranging from simple interfaces such as dry contact closures, to high-level interfaces, such as DCOM over TCP/IP.

load controllers The controllers are a DBC410 (4 x 10A ballast controller) and DLE1205 (12 x 5A leading edge dimmer). For this installation, controllers with individual circuit breakers on each circuit have been selected. This is to allow for simplified connection and testing of emergency lighting systems (see separate Technical Guide: Emergency Lighting).


Cct Capacity

Drawing Designator

Fixture

DLE1205 Box 1 C1 DLE1205 Box 1 C2 DLE1205 Box 1 C3 DLE1205 Box 1 C4 DLE1205 Box 1 C5 DLE1205 Box 1 C6 DLE1205 Box 1 C7 DLE1205 Box 1 C8 DLE1205 Box 1 C9 DLE1205 Box 1 C10 DLE1205 Box 1 C11 DLE1205 Box 1 C12 DBC410 Box 2 C1 DBC410 Box 2 C2 DBC410 Box 2 C2 DBC410 Box 2 C4

1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W

Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Spare Spare Spare Circuit Circuit Circuit Spare

1 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

LV Downlight LV Downlight LV Downlight LV Downlight LV Downlight LV Downlight Track Track Track

3 4 5

Fluorescent 2 x 36W Fluorescent 2 x 36W Fluorescent 2 x 36W

50W 50W 50W 50W 50W 50W

Qty

Load

6 2 11 14 4 4

300W 100W 550W 700W 200W 200W

6 6 9

432W 432W 648W

 2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet, DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.  LON is the registered trademark of Echelon Corporation.


Page 5 of 5

application guide

luxury home

This application guide contains information on: q Basic lighting control functionality



Integration with airconditioning



Integration with security systems



Integration with audio-visual systems



Control of equipment such as blinds, ceiling fans, louvres, irrigation systems and floor heating



Remote control through hand-held control units, the Internet or over the telephone



The typical smart home comprises several integrated systems transparently working together to provide convenience and security to the homeowner. Some of the resulting functionality includes:



Different lighting scenes and moods such as WELCOME, GOODBYE or GOODNIGHT that can be activated from any keypad, wired or wireless touchscreen or remote control



Control of many different styles of lighting sources such as LED, incandescent or fluorescent lamps, from the push of one button.



Control of lighting, music and airconditioning on the same lighting control keypad



The drawing of blinds and extinguishing of lights to occur when the security system is armed



The activation of lights and music to welcoming levels in desired areas, when the security system is disarmed



The activation of key internal lights, blinds opened and keypads frozen while the external lights flash on and off to attract attention, if the PANIC button is pressed or the security system is triggered



Different profile actions to occur when the security system is disarmed by different members of the family



The home to appear occupied when nobody’s present through the activation of lights and other equipment at different times of the day or at random



Floor heating, irrigation systems and pool plant, garage doors, ceiling and exhaust fans, heated towel rails or external louvers to be integrated together with the lighting control, so that it will automatically be turned on/off through timer control or from one lighting control panel.



Monitoring the home through cameras over the Internet



Activation of all egress pathways when smoke sensors have been tripped in addition to initiating the PANIC alarm on the security system



Allowing irrigation systems to operate only when the soil is too dry, regardless of any ongoing timer program



Turning lights on when presence is detected and turning them off after a nominated time of no presence



Cinema style control in the Home Theatre room when the MOVIE button is selected: sequential activation of the projector, dimming the lights over time, drawing open the drapes as the projector screen lowers into position and selecting the appropriate movie title or sound track on the DVD player

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home

Page 1 of 11

The Philips Dynalite control system interfaces to the above equipment through common integration such as RS232, RS485, Infra Red and TCP/IP (Ethernet) through the DMNG232, DNG485, DIRTX8 and DNG100BT network gateways, respectively. Simple equipment such as floor heating, irrigation solenoids and airconditioning are usually controlled through relay or contact closure respectively.

typical layout Lower Ground Floor

Ground Floor

First Floor

Page 2 of 11


system outline All the main living areas such as the Living, Dining, Bedrooms and Bathrooms have dimmed lighting. Light fitting numbers are kept low (around 5-6 low-voltage down lights per group of lights). Smaller groups allow for more effective and efficient lighting design and control (i.e. D1, D2 etc), in addition to facilitating the use of the DIN series controllers. The Philips Dynalite DIN series controllers occupy a smaller footprint and require less real estate in distribution boards. The home’s distribution boards can be found on the ground floor and the first floor, in well-ventilated areas. This is done to minimise cable runs. On-Off lighting control is applied in utility areas such as the Laundry Storeroom and Garage (i.e. R1, R2 etc.) as they do not require dimming of the lighting. Lighting control panels are placed in each room (i.e. CP1, CP2 and CP12). These panels allow the homeowner control for such functions as “PANIC” and “GOODNIGHT”. Other panels such as those by the front door (CP6) allow system wide presets such as “GOODBYE” and “AWAY”. The latter preset emulates occupancy when nobody’s home - as a preventative security measure. The home also has LED lamps in the stairwell and pool areas for color changing effects and general mood setting. In addition to fundamental lighting, the Philips Dynalite system also controls other equipment such the ceiling fan in the master bedroom, bathroom run-on exhaust fans, garage doors, blinds and external louvers. The timers within the Philips Dynalite system allow periodic operation of pool cleaners, floor heating and heated towel rails. Sensors in the bathrooms activate lights when someone enters the space then turn everything off after a nominated period of vacancy, including any heat lamps or exhaust fans that were left running. Nominated sensors determine the amount of light present in the home and control the external louvers and blinds to ease the burden on the airconditioning system. The Philips Dynalite control system also interfaces to the security system so that all the internal lights are activated upon alarm or duress and all external lights flash periodically to attract attention from passers-by. Furthermore, all controlled blinds and louvers are opened allowing greater visibility of the inside of the home – from the outside. In addition to this, all internal lighting control panels are frozen – preventing lights from being switched off. Strategically placed PANIC buttons are configured on the lighting control panels. When pressed for a few seconds these allow the Philips Dynalite system to flag a duress alarm to the security system. The Philips Dynalite security interface also allows personalised settings to be applied throughout the home upon security system disarm by different family members. For example, a family member will disarm the security system with their designated PIN code at the front door location. A pathway of dimmed light illuminates the way to the first floor bedrooms (D11 at 80%, D7 at 80%, D12 at 95%, D27 and D28 at 80%). If the sensor in the bathroom detects that ample light is present then only the staircase lights (D12 at 80%) are activated to minimise the use of energy and exploit ambient daylight entering the home. At night, in addition to the above, the backyard lights (D18, R15) are also activated to provide a greater sense of security and discourage any would be intruder. This also allows the darkest corners of the home to be lit and inspected at a glance. The Philips Dynalite system also communicates with the multi-room audio system, channeling their favorite music track to the lounge and first floor sitting rooms only. The ducted airconditioning system is also instructed to


Page 3 of 11

commence operation at a pre-programmed set point. Different set points are chosen for different times of the year. Upon arming the security system, the Philips Dynalite system immediately activates a “lived-in” profile sequence of events. This activity activates lights and audio in different parts of the home, at nominated (or random) times, making the home appear occupied from the outside. The smoke sensors throughout the home are also interfaced to the Philips Dynalite control system. As these sensors are physically interconnected, a trip on any one sensor necessarily trips all others, which in turn also activates the PANIC scene as described above. The irrigation solenoids are also controlled by Dynalite relays at different times of the day and different seasons from the built-in 365-day timer. When the third party moisture sensor detects the presence of adequate moisture in the soil, the timer program is overridden and the garden is not watered. A third-party wireless touchscreen allows each family member complete control over the Philips Dynalite system as does the Philips Dynalite wall touchscreen. These units typically offer Ethernet connectivity, allowing their pages to be displayed not only in the home through a wireless router yet also over the World Wide Web. Different control actions can be sent from these units such as control of light levels in different rooms, audio source selection, timer programs for floor heating and irrigation systems. In addition to this, web cameras can also be incorporated to allow viewing of different areas around the home. Many of these audio control commands can be replicated on the same Philips Dynalite lighting control keypads in each room in addition to airconditioning settings. The home theatre room has audio-visual devices such as a DVD player, projector and audio amplifier/receiver. The Philips Dynalite system can co-ordinate the operation of these devices through the press of one MOVIE button on the lighting control keypad in that room. This will commence dimming the lights (D2 to 5% over 30 seconds) to a low level. The projector screen is then controlled to lower into position, behind the closed curtains (R3, R4). When the screen is in position, the curtains are controlled to open (R5, R6). All along, the projector has been activated and warming up. As the curtains are drawn, the opening credits and title of the selected movie appear on the lowered screen as the Philips Dynalite system has instructed the DVD player to start playing its disc in addition to instructing the receiver to channel the DVD source out into the speakers in that room. When the movie concludes, the homeowner presses the END button either on the lighting control keypad or the wireless touchscreen to initiate a reverse sequence of the above events. The third-party universal remote control can also be used to achieve this and other functions as it too can execute similar functionality. All the Philips Dynalite lighting control keypads and sensors are equipped with infrared receivers so that any sequence of codes transmitted from the universal remote are received and acted upon in the same way as a button press.

Page 4 of 11


the equipment (ground floor distribution board only)

the system in operation The lighting control panels around the home provide control for the lighting groups and other relayed equipment in each immediate area. The touchscreens are capable of controlling every area around the home.

M Neutral Down Up

Earth

Up Down 240V Control Supply

240V Motor Supply

Twin & Earth

C

Step Down TRX

N/O N/C

C

N/O N/C

Relay Coils Micro Processor

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 N/O

N/O

C

C

N/C

SHLD GND D+ D+15v AUX

N/C


Page 5 of 11

The DDNP1501 (Box#3) is utilised to supplement the network power supply, as the number of lighting control panel power requirement exceeds that supplied to the network by the two load controllers (Box#1 through to Box#8), due to the presence of the Philips Dynalite touchscreen. All blinds and curtains are connected to the DDRC810DT-GL in the following manner. Lighting control panels can be programmed to drive the blinds either up or down by manipulating the outputs of the associated controller in the desired manner. Floor heating is controlled by connecting the power directly to the output of the DDRC820FR due to the high currents associated with these appliances. The Philips Dynalite system can then activate the floor heating elements at programmed times. When the floor-heating element is active the temperature is then controlled by its own specific thermostat. This equipment is connected in the following way.

Ceiling fans are controlled by Philips Dynalite through the DDMC801 controller, fitted with the LSFCM202 and connected in the following way.

Four levels of control are possible through the LSFCM202. Four lighting control panel buttons are dedicated to the four settings HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW and OFF respectively. The irrigation solenoids are connected to the DDRC810DT in addition to feedback from the third-party moisture sensor through the AUX input of this same device. The third-party moisture sensor used in this installation outputs a contact closure upon detecting pre-defined moisture levels.

Page 6 of 11


Although the irrigation system will operate during programmed times, the moisture sensor input can override this until such time that moisture levels drop. The security system has been interfaced to Philips Dynalite through simple dry contact closure upon different security events. Upon the ALARM situation, the security system provides the Philips Dynalite system with a contact closure via one of the AUX inputs as described above. This action then triggers a sequence events starting with activation of all the lights in the home. Immediately afterwards, all blinds are drawn while the lighting control keypads are frozen. This same activity can be also be triggered from a lighting control panel that incorporates a programmed PANIC button. This button must be pressed for at least three seconds to avoid inadvertent or accidental presses. When activated it signals a duress alarm to the security system by breaking the normally closed dry contact input, as shown below.

Two types of airconditioning systems can be found in this home, ducted and split. Both systems typically interface to the Dynalite control system through dry contact closure. The home has ducted air conditioning throughout with separate split units in the living and master bedroom areas, although this is not depicted in the diagrams above for simplicity. Both systems usually require add-on modules available from the vendor. Connection occurs via the DDRC810DT-GL. One of these units can be found in both distribution board and is used specifically for ELV switching only. Light control panels in the master bedroom (CP20,21), bedrooms (CP16,17,14), living room (CP11) and sitting room (CP13) incorporate an


Page 7 of 11

AC button which turns the airconditioning on and off at different set-points for different times of the day and year. Home theatre equipment is connected and controlled by the Philips Dynalite system both through the DIRTX8 with infrared commands and through the DNG232 with serial RS232 commands in the manner shown below.

Each of these devices is programmed to transmit the necessary codes in the appropriate sequence. For example, the DMNG232 will first transmit the STANDBY code to the home theatre receiver. Subsequently the commands to select the desired source (DVD) and zone are sent one after the other. In addition to this, the volume is gradually increased to attain the true cinema experience. Simultaneously, the Philips Dynalite control system has been dimming the lights (D2) over 30 seconds and lowering the projector screen. The wireless touchscreen can control all the equipment connected to the Philips Dynalite system. It does this by displaying HTML pages of controls that reside on the DNG100BT web page server. These pages are transmitted wirelessly throughout the home via the connected third-party wireless router. In addition to this, several web cameras are also accessible from these pages and allow inspection of different areas around the home both from within the home or on any web browser over the internet, through the homeowner’s connection. The DMNG100BT translates Ethernet into DyNet and accordingly provides Internet connectivity to the Dynalite control system. The DMNG100BT and wireless router connections are depicted in the diagram below.

Page 8 of 11


The Philips Dynalite lighting control panels throughout the home are programmed to do more than activate lights On and Off. Panels in main living areas such as the living/family room have the ability to control lights, audio, blinds and airconditioning. This panel (CP11) is shown below. The first button on the first column activates the Relax mood setting in this area. This setting entails dimming the main lights to a lower level (D17,16 to 85% over 5 sec). If a different lighting level is desired then the up and down arrow buttons can be pressed to either raise or lower the current light setting respectively. In addition to this a preselected music track is channelled into the living room while the blinds are drawn down. The Air Con button can start or stop the airconditioning in that area. According to the time of year, different temperature presets are chosen automatically. The Blinds button, when pressed, changes the function of the up and down arrow buttons to inch up or down the blinds. The second button column allows the homeowner to select a music source for listening in the living room through the multi-room audio system. The Off button extinguishes all volume and de-activates source equipment. The third button column provides the transport controls for the audio selection. The buttons are (in order): Play, Stop, Pause, Skip FWD, Skip REV, Fast FWD. The up and down arrow buttons on the column, control the volume in the living room. The engraving on each button is back-lit allowing the homeowner to make the correct selection every time. Relax

iPod

Air Con

Tuner

Blinds

CD

Furthermore, the LED indicators on each button can be programmed to flash at different frequencies during different activities such as Play, Blinds up and Blinds down.

Off


Page 9 of 11

The bed side panels (CP20,21) allow control of lighting in the room and surrounding areas. The Fan button toggles the ceiling fan between HIGH to MEDIUM to LOW to OFF when pressed in succession. The LED indicator for Lights Reading

this button flashes intermittently, indicating that the cycle of fan control in

Balcony

currently underway. The DNstairs button illuminates a dim path from the

WIR

master bedroom to the downstairs kitchen (D25 to 20%, D27,D28 and D12 to

Fan DNstairs

40%, D10 to 50%) when pressed after 11pm. At other times, this button only activates the lights in the adjacent hallway (D27 to 80%). The Goodnight button (with the engraved moon icon) shuts the home down if pressed for longer than three seconds. This press delay is done to avoid accidental activation as for the adjacent Panic button (with the engraved

bell icon). The Goodnight setting turns Off everything in and around the home, connected to the Philips Dynalite system. In addition, blinds are drawn closed and the airconditioning system is turned off. The Philips Dynalite control system then indicates to the security system that the home’s perimeter (front door and window reed switches and glass break sensors) is to be sealed, securing the home while everyone sleeps.

load controllers The following load schedule outlines the devices found in the ground floor distribution board. The DDMC801 mixed controller is used for dimming resistive type lamps within the apartment.

One

controller (Box 3) has been fitted with a four-channel relay module (LSRM401 4 x 1A) and a four-channel leading edge dimming module (LSDM401 4 x 1A). The other controllers have been fitted with 2 x LSDM401 modules. The DDRC810DT-GL is used to switch Extra Low Voltage (ELV) loads such as the irrigation solenoids that are usually powered by a 24VDC power supply. ELV loads must never be switched on this same device when switching 240VAC loads also.

load schedule for distribution board on ground floor Load Controller

Cct Capacity

Drawing Designator

Fixture

DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802 DDMC802

240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19

LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W Incandescent 50W uplight LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W Incandescent 50W uplight LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W LV Downlight 50W

Box 1 Box 1 Box 1 Box 1 Box 1 Box 1 Box 1 Box 1 Box 2 Box 2 Box 2 Box 2 Box 2 Box 2 Box 2 Box 2 Box 3 Box 3 Box 3

Page 10 of 11

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C1 C2 C3

Qty

Load

2 6 1 2 2 4 3 4 6 2 2 2 2 1 1 4 4 4 2

100W 300W* 50W 100W 100W 200W 150W 200W 300W 100W 100W 100W 100W 50W 500W 200W 200W 200W 100W


DDMC802 Box 3 C4 DDMC802 Box 3 C5 DDMC802 Box 3 C6 DDMC802 Box 3 C7 DDMC802 Box 3 C8 DDRC1220FR Box 4 C1 DDRC1220FR Box 4 C2 DDRC1220FR Box 4 C3 DDRC1220FR Box 4 C4 DDRC1220FR Box 4 C5 DDRC1220FR Box 4 C6 DDRC1220FR Box 4 C7 DDRC1220FR Box 4 C8 DDRC1220FR Box 4 C9 DDRC1220FR Box 4 C10 DDRC1220FR Box 4 C11 DDRC1220FR Box 4 C12 DDRC810DT Box 5 C1 DDRC810DT Box 5 C2 DDRC810DT Box 5 C3 DDRC810DT Box 5 C4 DDRC810DT Box 5 C5 DDRC810DT Box 5 C6 DDRC810DT Box 5 C7 DDRC810DT Box 5 C8 DDRC810DT Box 6 C1 DDRC810DT Box 6 C2 DDRC810DT Box 6 C3 DDRC810DT Box 6 C4 DDRC810DT Box 6 C5 DDRC810DT Box 6 C6 DDRC810DT Box 6 C7 DDRC810DT Box 6 C8 DDRC810DT Box 7 C1 DDRC810DT Box 7 C2 DDRC810DT Box 7 C3 DDRC810DT Box 7 C4 DDRC810DT Box 7 C5 DDRC810DT Box 7 C6 DDRC810DT Box 7 C7 DDRC810DT Box 7 C8 DDRC820FR Box 8 C1 DDRC820FR Box 8 C2 DDRC820FR Box 8 C3 DDRC820FR Box 8 C4 DDRC820FR Box 8 C5 DDRC820FR Box 8 C6

240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 240W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W 2400W ELV ELV ELV ELV ELV ELV ELV ELV 4800W 4800W 4800W 4800W 4800W 4800W

D21 R12 R13 R17 R10 R8 R1 R9 R11 R14 R15 R16 R28 R29 R18

Incandescent 50W uplight Exhaust fan Exhaust fan CFL Bick light 15W LV Dowlight 50W LV Downlight 50W CFL Brick light 15W LV Downlight 50W T5 Linear Fluorescent 18W Incandescent 100W Incandescent 100W CFL Brick light 15W CFL Bollard 10W DFL Bollard 10W TF Linear fluorescent

3 1 1 1 2 1 4 2 3 4 2 3 6 10 1

150W 240W 240W 15W 100W 50W 60W 100W 54W 400W 200W 45W 60W 100W 18W

R3 R4 R5 R6 R23 R24 R25 R26 R27 R28

Projector screen motor Projector screen motor Curtain motor Curtain motor Blind motor Blind motor Blind motor Blind motor Blind motor Blind motor

R7 R25 R26 R27

Pulsed dry contact** ELV Irrigation solenoid ELV Irrigation solenoid ELV Irrigation solenoid

R19 R20 R21 R22

Pool cleaner Pool water jet pump Pool waterfall pump Other pool plant

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

500W 500W 500W 500W 500W 500W 500W 500W 500W 500W 500W 500W 500W 500W 500W 500W ELV ELV ELV ELV ELV ELV ELV ELV 4800W 4800W 4800W 4800W

*The maximum load current for any DDMC802 output is 2A. Each plug-in module such as the DDLM102 should never have more than 2A load connected to it. When 8 x DDLM102 modules are used with a DDMC802 controller base/motherboard the total load current should not exceed 10A and it is strongly recommended that each such controller be protected with its own dedicated circuit breaker. **Applies to certain garage door models that require a pulsed dry contact to operate up, stop and down in that order.



Page 11 of 11

application guide

office

This application guide contains information on: q Providing workspace lighting using dimmable DALI HF fluorescent ballasts



Using existing PCs and LAN for user control in open plan office space



Automatic control using occupancy sensing



Daylight harvesting of natural light



Dynamic LED signage



Interfacing to a building management system (BMS) using DCOM over TCP/IP



Lighting control plays a strategic role in the operation of a modern office environment. It ensures that the visual performance of the lighting equipment is appropriate to the needs of the occupants, while simultaneously conserving energy. By day, illumination levels can be maintained dynamically, both to comply with relevant lighting and energy codes and to ensure optimum worker performance. After hours, the control is more aggressive toward energy conservation, but still accommodates the needs of maintenance and security staff and late night workers.

It is no longer socially acceptable or

commercially astute to burn all of the lighting throughout the day and for half the night, yet a feeling of personal security and well being must be protected. Workstations co-exist with traditional enclosed offices in many buildings. Appropriate strategies for the lighting controls must be determined according to the specific needs of each application.

The

workstations typically share an array of fluorescents overhead while corridors, lobbies, meeting rooms and amenities can have a variety of local lighting types and technologies.

typical layout Floor Distribution Board Instant HWS

Circuit 12

Circuit 10

up

Lift Staff Amenities

down

Exec Office S2

CP1

S1

Circuits 11 - 14 LED Sign

Circuit 2

CP3 Circuit 1

Circuit 1 Circuit 1

S3

S4

Circuit 1

Circuit 3

LEGEND

Circuit 4

Incandescent LV

S7

Circuit 5

CP2

Meeting

Fluorescent Luminaire

Circuit 1

Circuit 6

Toilet

Hot Water Service

Circuit 9 S8

Circuit 7

Circuit 1 S9

S5

S6

S6

Sensor

Toilet S10

Circuit 8

Dynalite Application Guide – Office

Circuit 1

Page 1 of 8

system outline A typical office suite could be a single office or just one floor of many that is tenanted by a large organisation. Entry areas are accessible to visitors and clients, hence track or downlights would be found here, in addition to dynamic LED signage that highlights the company logo. The open plan area would have fluorescent luminaires that are laid out in a regular pattern to achieve uniformity.

They are often wired in large blocks and inefficiently switched the same way (this is

inevitable where the design is based on an empty floorplan). For undimmed installations, the cabling would at least be run parallel to windows, enabling a row of edge luminaires to be daylight switched by the control system. The evolution of addressable fluorescent ballasts has made it possible to treat individual luminaires as a dynamic component of the space, with lighting over workstations controlled individually or in small numbers. This is becoming cost-effective considering the frequent rearrangement that takes place in many organisations. The layout appears to be conventional, but the unique response from individual lamps is achieved electronically. In corridors and entry foyers, identical lighting troffers can be treated in an entirely different manner to those above the desks of employees. They might also be found in staff amenities areas, where their purpose is different again, due to the low occupancy of the space. The meeting room shows four circuits of downlights, while the fringe areas including staff amenities have just a few essential lights that could be of almost any type. Operation of a typical office would be;

entry lobby The first person to arrive would be detected by the nearby DUS804C motion sensor or would be required to initiate a system response by pressing the „ARRIVAL‟ button of an adjacent wall control panel. Typically, two channels of a DDRC820FR relay controller would activate the entry downlights. lighting could be interleaved so that half-switching is implemented outside normal hours.

This

Philips

Dynalite controllers have the intelligence to rotate lamp usage to equalise the operating hours of the lamps and reduce maintenance costs. ELV downlights might also be included to provide an attractive feature at the reception counter. The appropriate Philips Dynalite controller would be a leading-edge or trailing-edge dimmer, depending on the type of lighting transformer used. Increasingly, specifiers are using digitally-controlled transformers that can be matched to standard Philips Dynalite ballast controllers. Innovative display panels are available using LED or fluorescent panels that drift through the spectrum. Dynamic colour sequences can be programmed into the DDLEDC401 LED Controller. When the system is in its „normal‟ day mode, the selected sequence can then be initiated.

Page 2 of 8

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Office

Fluorescent lights are generally the most numerous throughout an office installation. The choice of internal components is fundamental to the selection of the Philips Dynalite system components to control them. Depending on the budget, a degree of sophistication is now available.

Dimmable office lighting is

becoming more common for both ergonomic and energy-conscious applications. The ability to dim has a direct bearing on the aesthetics and comfort of the space and is also significant in conserving energy. A luminaire that can be switched on and off electronically, has a wide range of control possibilities. It can also eliminate the expensive practice of physically modifying the electrical wiring each time the office fit-out changes.

executive offices These are often as elaborate as a fully-featured conference room.

Multifunction sensors and wall

mounted user control panels may be used in combination to provide full architectural control, depending on the complexity of the lighting scenes required. As this is also a working office, PC desktop access to the Philips Dynalite network might be appropriate, as well as wall mount control panels.

small offices Small offices don‟t consume a great deal of energy but collectively the total energy of many small offices is significant. In a refurbishment that includes individual offices, it is not cost-effective to hardwire a conventional switch for just two or three luminaires.

Increasingly though, it is becoming

mandatory for a local control device to be made available. Software added to the Desktop PC that can access the lighting control system can allow each user to control their own local environment as there is no additional hardware required.

open plan offices A variety of approaches are available, subject to the luminaire control gear and to local energy regulations. Networked DyNet sensors may be used to provide saturation coverage of open plan areas. All lights might be kept „ON‟ during a normal day and be progressively allowed to dim and extinguish after hours as staff leave. Multifunction sensors read the value of illuminance in their field of view. This can be harnessed to provide stepless dimming control; both to maintain a pre-determined light level and to capitalise on the availability of natural light. Philips Dynalite sensors support multiple functions allowing presence detection and natural light level measurement from the one device.

staff amenities In these areas, occupancy sensing is usually appropriate with long delay times. The luminaires might be the conventional office type or any combination of aesthetic creations. If toilet lights are to be simply switched, they can share a common relay channel. If some of the lighting is extra low voltage halogen, however, it should be managed by a leading-edge or trailing-edge dimmer as appropriate, to enable soft starting and voltage regulation to the lamp. An alternative approach is to have the lights „ON‟ during Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Office

Page 3 of 8

normal hours and to enable a DUS804C sensor or single „one shot‟ pushbutton panel after hours. In this event, the lights can be flashed off momentarily as a warning, before the lighting is switched off.

conference rooms Architectural lighting control is required to adjust the lighting of the space to its many different applications. A 10-button wall mounted control panel provides the required scene and fade rate. A hand-held infrared remote control might be appropriate to adjust the lighting from anywhere in the room during presentations or meetings. Most Philips Dynalite controllers have an optional DMX interface that enables inter-operability with audio-visual devices, while many AV systems natively support the DyNet protocol. Multifunction sensors are used to detect when rooms have been vacant for a period of time.

staircases Local regulations must always be adhered to.

Aside from this, common sense should prevail.

The

staircase lighting would usually remain on during „normal‟ hours, with a single pushbutton made available for timed override after hours. If appropriate, stairway lighting could be made to flash briefly as a warning before lights are extinguished. If regulating ballasts are used, they could be ramped down over 30 seconds before switching off.

demand load shedding Many parts of the world experience peak electricity loads that their infrastructure is unable to deliver. The solution is to defer some of the load at those critical moments. A Philips Dynalite control system can have it‟s load prioritised for such an event. Low requirement loads can be partially shed, almost transparently when dimming is available. Depending on the urgency of the request to load shed, a hierarchy of switching can be implemented.

Unlike airconditioning, lighting can be made granular,

enabling corridors, for example, to respond to a greater extent than the adjacent workstations.

out-of-hours This may be determined by the BMS or by a Philips Dynalite DTC602 stand-alone timer clock. On an individual office floor, it is common for just one or two workers to be at their workstations when everyone else has gone home.

Manual control regimes leave the entire office alight, while many

automated systems create a feeling of insecurity by switching off all the lights in the immediate vicinity of the occupant/s. In a Philips Dynalite controlled environment, lighting in the corridors and amenities can be kept on when any one of the local zones is active. Cleaners and security personnel often waste energy after hours. Philips Dynalite systems can allow transient personnel to gain lighting access using infrared remote controls. These can be programmed to provide an appropriate duration of local or corridor lighting. For example, a cleaner may have local workstations illuminated for ten minutes, while a security guard might just activate the corridor lighting for five minutes. The remote only needs to be pointed at any of the DUS804C sensors in the local area. Page 4 of 8


daylighting strategy This is a topic for separate detailed analysis, as each application is unique. During daylight hours, the ingress of natural light can be selectively harvested within parts of the space that have a component of natural light. Some designers always switch off perimeter lighting, while an increasing number apply light sensors for detecting the natural sunlight available and then dim the lighting accordingly . This action must be carefully undertaken to avoid issues of disturbing or reduce the comfort of those occupying the space. In particular, care should be exercised where window blinds are in use due to the possibility of fragmenting a light detection zone. As with other issues of „granularity‟, the solution might be to deploy a greater number of sensors. The challenge of harnessing daylight is to attenuate the artificial light without creating discomfort that is associated with bright windows and dull interiors. Philips Dynalite‟s networked DUS804C sensors detect illuminance as well as occupancy. They each contain embedded intelligence, enabling their response to be varied at different times of the day. When excess natural light falls on a perimeter row, the occupancy sensor might allow dimming to a very low level in the absence of motion, but dim to 50% when occupancy is detected.

This is often necessary to avoid

shadowing and provide adequate horizontal illuminance on desk surfaces.

DALI ballasts provide an

appropriate vehicle for daylight response, as there is no longer a physical connection between the hardwired circuitry and the ability of individual luminaires to be dimmed. Luminaires that run parallel to the windows may be switched or dimmed, irrespective of their physical wiring.

maintained illuminance This strategy can offer greater savings than daylight harvesting, as previously discussed. In the absence of any natural light (late at night for example), the Illuminance levels of many workstations and corridors are far greater than is recommended in lighting standards. stepless dimming of controllable fluorescent lighting.

This can be harvested by the

Once a target level has been established, a

desirable light level will be maintained irrespective of environmental changes in the space. Savings of 10-20% are typical, while greater than 50% is not uncommon in the retrofit of „70s buildings.

maintenance reporting Intelligent lighting control gear has enabled Philips Dynalite systems to collect data about individual lamps and luminaire components in real time. Lamp run-time tracking is available, which assists with scheduled lamp replacement. The strategic use of this resource can reduce life cycle operating costs and avoid the drift into a sub-standard installation. Individual component ballast or lamp failures may be reported to management from a Philips Dynalite controller or an informed GSM message may be sent directly to maintenance personnel.


Page 5 of 8

the equipment

This diagram outlines the equipment required for a typical multi-story application. connected to the others by a DNG485 network bridge.

Each floor is

This enables a higher speed trunk to

communicate filtered messages between the floors. It also provides optical isolation as a protection measure.

Page 6 of 8


the system in operation PC control Desktop PC Access is available to locally control individual workspace lighting, blinds and possibly airflow using each occupant‟s desktop PC.

EnvisionProject establishes an interface between the Philips

Dynalite RS485 network and the corporate IP network. The physical location of individual clients on the LAN is logically linked to the occupants‟ local lighting hardware.

Functions made by a desktop

slider or icon selection are immediately processed in the DyNet system, invoking a personalised response. Outside normal hours, the availability of local lighting can be linked to whether or not the local PC is active. If it is hibernating or switched off, the office lighting can be extinguished.

EnvisionProject also provides bi-directional

access to the BMS, which enables centralised monitoring and scheduling of the lighting control system that has been tailored to the specific installation.

Smaller applications might only operate locally, not through a BMS. A simpler dry-contact interface (DDMIDC8) might then be used to transfer some basic instructions to another system. For example, the alarm output level of a security or EWOS (Emergency Warning) system might be used to enable a panic mode in the lighting system or occupancy detection from the lighting system might be passed on to the security system after hours via a spare relay output channel. In most instances, a single interface on the RS485 trunk makes the hardware connection between the two systems, either simply or at a

Example of simple PC control software from an icon in the system tray

high level.

sensors Sensors S1-S10 are all DUS804C, which combine motion detection, PE measurement and IR reception. In this scenario, IR reception would not be used.

Some sensors such as S8, S9 and S10 in the staff

amenities, would be configured permanently for motion detection and would ensure lighting is switched off when the space was not occupied. Others would be configured to do different things at different times of the day. S5 and S6 are adjacent to windows so that during the day they could be configured to dim the row of fixtures near the windows whenever sufficient natural light was available. This practice is commonly referred to as “Daylight Harvesting”. After hours, the sensors would automatically switch over to motion detection mode. Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Office

Page 7 of 8

load controllers Circuits 7-10 are switched fluorescent loads and are controlled by a relay controller. The DDRC820FR shown in our example has 20 Amp inductive load capability and bi-stable latching relays. This one device has 6 independent outputs; hence it is cost-effective to also switch the toilets and stairwell lighting, as well as having the capacity to control the instant hot water heater.

A DDBC120-DALI controller enables individual dimming and soft switching of commercial fluorescent DALI troffers on Circuit 1. When all troffers connected to the controller are switched off it automatically removes the power to the troffers to save energy, as DALI ballasts continue to consume a few Watts, even when switched off. Circuits 2-6 are controlled by a DDMC802 Multipurpose Controller, which incorporates modular control cards. A 1 x 2A dimming module (DDLM102) controls a circuit of downlights and a 1 x 4A dimming module (DDLM104) controls 10 LV down light fittings over the boardroom table.

A DDLEDC401 LED controller is part of our demonstration to highlight the growing use of dynamic display items in commercial venues, in this case dynamic signage displaying the company logo.


Cct Capacity

Drawing Designator

Fixture

DDBC120-DALI Box 1 C1 DDMC802 Box 2 C1 DDMC802 Box 2 C2 DDMC802 Box 2 C3 DDMC802 Box 2 C4 DDMC802 Box 2 C5 DDMC802 Box 2 C6 DDMC802 Box 2 C7 DDMC802 Box 2 C8 DDRC820FR Box 3 C1 DDRC820FR Box 3 C2 DDRC820FR Box 3 C3 DDRC820FR Box 3 C4 DDRC820FR Box 3 C5 DDRC820FR Box 3 C6 DDLEDC401 Box 4 C1 DDLEDC401 Box 4 C2 DDLEDC401 Box 4 C3 DDLEDC401 Box 4 C4

4800W 240W 240W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 1200W 4800W 4800W 4800W 4800W 4800W 4800W 24V 1A 24V 1A 24V 1A 24V 1A

Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Spare Spare Spare Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Spare Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit

1 3 4 2 6 5

2x36W Fluorescent Troffer 50W Downlight 50W Downlight 50W Downlight 50W Downlight 50W Downlight

29 3 3 4 3 10

2088W 150W 150W 200W 150W 500W

7 8 9 10 12

1x36W Fluorescent Batten 1x36W Fluorescent Batten 1x18W Fluorescent Batten 1x36W Fluorescent Batten Instant Hot Water Heater

1 1 1 1 1

36W 36W 18W 36W 2400W

11 11 11 11

LED LED LED LED

1 1 1 1

0.75A 0.75A 0.75A 0.75A

Signage Signage Signage Signage

Qty

– – – –

Red channel Green channel Blue channel White channel

Load


Page 8 of 8


application guide themed venue This application guide contains information on: Provisioning for temporary DMX512 control



Control of LED & cold cathode neon lighting



Control using a touchscreen with graphical floorplan representations



Lighting control in themed venues is vital to ensure appropriate environmental aesthetics and functional illumination. Themed venues such as restaurants, bar and clubs, can be used for a range of purposes which can vary extensively throughout the course of a day.

Lighting levels during preparation and

cleaning phases need to be appropriate so that tasks can be carried out in a safe and efficient manner. During times of patronage, adjustments to lighting levels are necessary to provide the appropriate architectural appearance for the atmosphere desired. Dining areas will frequently require a range of settings when used for functions to align with event proceedings such as seating, serving, dining, presentation and departure. Discerning clients may often request alternate settings to create a unique environment. Lighting in podium or stage areas will also require a range of settings for different uses, such as live performances and presentations. For certain events or functions it may also be necessary for the lighting to operate in unison with temporary entertainment of theatrical lighting systems. Provision should also be included to link the security system ensuring all lighting is turned off when the system is armed, so that energy is conserved outside of operating hours.

typical layout CP3

CP1

Stage Kitchen Circuit 14 Circuit 13

Café Bar

Circuit 15 DTK 600

Circuit 6 Bar

Circuit 5

Circuit 7 Circuit 8

Circuit 1 Circuit 4

Circuit 3

Restaurant

Circuit 12

Circuit 2 Circuit 11

Cove 1

Legend Downlights Wall Lights Pendant

Cove 2 CP2

Circuit 10

Circuit 9

4 Colour LED Neon Fluorescent Batten CP2

User Control Point

Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Themed Venue

Page 1 of 5

system outline The application example detailed is based on a typical themed restaurant venue. Eight channels of cove recessed 4-colour LED strip and two circuits of central decorative luminaires provide main dining area lighting. For patron access, four circuits of down lights are used to illuminate the perimeter of dining areas.

The bar incorporates a circuit of low voltage down lights over the serving counter and two

channels of decorative overhead neon feature lighting. One circuit of low voltage fixtures is installed behind the bar for staff access and a circuit of track lighting included for rear wall feature lighting. Stage lighting includes a single circuit of recessed down lights and three circuits of adjustable track mounted spot fixtures. Linear fluorescent fixtures are used within the kitchen.

the equipment

the system in operation User control panels CP1, CP2 and CP3 are provided to enable the system control necessary at each location. The DTP170 LCD Touchscreen located at the bar is used for advanced control and programming functions. The DTP170 includes the facility to create a series of display pages that enable users to adjust presets for specific event requirements. The DDNP1501 is utilised to supplement the network power supply, as required for operation of the touchscreen.

Page 2 of 5


control panels Control panel CP1 is located at the staff entrance as a master control point for staff entering and leaving the premises.

The control panel

ENABLE

incorporates two pushbuttons and a key-locking switch. The key switch

ON

enables the control panel operation, to ensure that there is no

OFF

DISABLE

unauthorised use. This is particularly important, as the “OFF” button is a

PANEL

master off control that will turn off all lighting within the restaurant. The “ON” button would usually select a welcome scene or a cleaners‟ lighting CP1

scene that would provide sufficient light for cleaners to work, without consuming excess power or expending lamp life unnecessarily.

The Maitre D‟ station would be located at the entrance door, where guests can check their reservations and then be guided to their tables. A four-scene control panel (CP2) would be located at this point and would comprise the following scenes: 1

Set Up

This scene is used when the restaurant staff is laying up the tables, prior to opening at lunchtime and for dinner. It is a practical „working‟ scene, rather than an aesthetic scene.

SET UP

LUNCH

2

Lunch

DINNER

scene to compensate for natural daylight encountered by patrons before entering

SHOW

CP2

This button selects a preset scene for the lunch period. This is a relatively bright and after exiting the restaurant.

3

Dinner

This button selects a preset scene for the dinner period. This scene would be a lower level with the emphasis on ambience.

4

Show

This button selects a scene to be used when there is a live show on the stage. Note that this scene would be the same as the manual button on the local control panel on stage. In this scene the general lighting would be reduced so that attention would be drawn to the stage. Stage circuits would come under manual control from the faders on control panel CP3. This would enable the band or individual artist to set up a manual scene for the stage area to suit the performance on stage, without altering what has been set in the dining and bar areas.

CP3 would, in addition to the preset functions detailed above, also have four preset scenes, five through to eight. These would set the

1

5

lighting on a preset basis for the channels associated with the stage.

2

6

3

7

4

8

The panel also includes four manual slide faders, so that stage lighting circuits can be independently adjusted.

CP3


Page 3 of 5

touch screen The DTP170 LCD Touchscreen would include scene selection pages, manual override pages and a timer clock to automatically select scenes. A graphical image of the entire restaurant floor plan could be a page in itself and from this page, it would be possible to review the current status of all lighting and temporarily modify the settings in one area for a special event. This is ideal for situations such as „birthday cake entrance‟ or for corporate entertainment evenings. In this page, simply touching one area of the restaurant – e.g. Restaurant, would then drill down the screen to that area only. It would then be possible to adjust individual circuits on a raise/lower basis.

Customised touchscreen pages provide the ability to „drill down‟ and adjust individual circuits within an area.

The touchscreen can also be programmed with a series of creative fade or chase sequences for the decorative neon and four colour LED circuits. These sequences can be set into operation when required from a custom display page. One sequence might include a series of long subtle colour fades to align with theme changes over the course of an evening. More lively sequences might also be programmed to create theatrical effects for celebrations or parties. Some other functions available from this control position could be a “waiter call” button, to ring a buzzer in the kitchen to request the presence of a waiter to take an order. Another facility that can be provided is a panic function to send all of the lighting to full in the event of an emergency.

Page 4 of 5


load controllers The DLE410 (4 x 10A) and DLE1205 (12 x 5A) leading edge dimmers are used for controlling the combination of mains and low voltage incandescent lighting circuits. One channel on the DLE1205 is also configured to provide switched output for control of the fluorescent kitchen lighting. The DLE1205 can also be optimised to be dual ported, which enables the dimmer to be controlled over the popular DMX512 protocol from a portable theatrical/entertainment lighting control desk when used for specific functions or events. Control from the security system can be easily integrated through a dry output connected to the

AUX

input of any controller. Two DLEDC401 LED controllers are utilised so creative

colour mixing and sequencing routines can be programmed for the two groups of four colour (RGBW) LED recessed cove lighting.


Cct

Drawing

Capacity

Designator

DLE410 Box 1 C1

2400W

Circuit 1

DLE410 Box 1 C2

2400W

Circuit 2

DLE410 Box 1 C3

2400W

DLE410 Box 1 C4

2400W

DLE1205 Box 2 C1 DLE1205 Box 2 C2

Fixture

Qty

Load

Decorative Pendant 700W

2

1400W

Decorative Pendant 700W

3

2100W

Circuit 3

Cold Cathode Neon

1

800W

Circuit 4

Cold Cathode Neon

1

700W

1200W

Circuit 5

LV Downlight 50W

4

200W

1200W

Circuit 6

LV Downlight 50W

9

450W

DLE1205 Box 2 C3

1200W

Circuit 7

LV Track Lighting 50W

4

200W

DLE1205 Box 2 C4

1200W

Circuit 8

LV Downlight 50W

4

200W

DLE1205 Box 2 C5

1200W

Circuit 9

LV Downlight 50W

4

200W

DLE1205 Box 2 C6

1200W

Circuit 10

LV Downlight 50W

2

100W

DLE1205 Box 2 C7

1200W

Circuit 11

LV Downlight 50W

2

100W

DLE1205 Box 2 C8

1200W

Circuit12

Wall Light 100W

7

700W

DLE1205 Box 2 C9

1200W

Circuit 13

Adjustable Spot 100W

4

400W

DLE1205 Box 2 C10

1200W

Circuit 14

Downlight 100W

4

400W

DLE1205 Box 2 C11

1200W

Circuit 15

HF Fluorescent 2 x 36W

6

432W

DLE1205 Box 2 C12

1200W

Spare

DDLEDC401 Box 3 C1

24V 1A

Cove 1

LED Strip – Red channel

1

0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 3 C2

24V 1A

Cove 1

LED Strip – Green channel

1

0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 3 C3

24V 1A

Cove 1

LED Strip – Blue channel

1

0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 3 C4

24V 1A

Cove 1

LED Strip – White channel

1

0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 4 C1

24V 1A

Cove 2

LED Strip – Red channel

1

0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 4 C2

24V 1A

Cove 2

LED Strip – Green channel

1

0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 4 C3

24V 1A

Cove 2

LED Strip – Blue channel

1

0.75A

DDLEDC401 Box 4 C4

24V 1A

Cove 2

LED Strip – White channel

1

0.75A



Page 5 of 5

4. Technical Guides

technical guide control principles overview This document outlines the structure and principles employed in a Philips Dynalite control system, including information on DyNet network architecture, operating concepts, system commands, device addressing and other associated features.

system structure The Philips Dynalite system utilises a true distributed processing architecture, where a range of devices are interconnected over an RS485 network to form a complete control solution.

All commands and

status information is passed to all devices over this network using the event based DyNet protocol.

All

Philips Dynalite control devices incorporate an integral microprocessor and internal non-volatile memory. This allows for each device to store its own configuration data and possessing requirements to perform the required features and functions, meeting the project requirements.

All device

configurations are configured through the use of EnvisionProject, Philips Dynalite‟s commissioning, monitoring and control software, used to bring the individual devices together to form a system solution for projects needs. Philips Dynalite‟s distribution of intelligent devices architecture, dramatically improves reliability over systems that incorporate centralised processors, where malfunction of one device could result in total system failure. Should a single device fail in a Philips Dynalite system, all other devices will continue to operate as normal. This distributed architecture also supports a wide range of interfaces, manufactured by Philips Dynalite and other system vendors, to offer a robust flexible approach to control of lighting and other automation systems found in modern projects. Philips Dynalite‟s range of control products can be broadly categorised as a relationship between; User Interfaces, Integration devices and Load Controllers. The user interface range includes many different user control panels, LCD touchscreens, timer clocks, computer head-end software and sensors. User interfaces are generally programmed to trigger single command messages onto the DyNet network, in response to a user or input action. Integration devices have been developed to allow other third-party systems that are commonly found within projects to control the Philips Dynalite system or vice versa. This allows many systems to work together achieving a required task and reducing the need for the enduser to interact with each individual system.

Philips Dynalite has developed an extensive range of

controllers with a variety of output types, combinations and load ratings. Load controllers constantly listen to the network messages from Dynet and only respond to command messages that relate to the controller‟s specific addressing configuration.

Control associations are established between user

interfaces, integration devices and load controllers using straightforward addressing and command techniques with in the Dynet protocol.

Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles

Page 1 of 11

device addressing physical Each Philips Dynalite load controller on the Dynet network can be identified as a device type and a box number. With this information the different devices on single networks can be individually addressed for commissioning. All physical control channels within the load controllers of a Philips Dynalite system have a Physical and Logical Address. Physical addresses are used within the load controllers and refer to the physical control channel within a device. This is primarily used during system commissioning to configure devices as they can be used to identify the individual channels.

To identify an individual circuit

connected to a load controller, a Device Type, Box Number and Physical channel number are used by the commissioning software Envision.

The term Physical refers to the individual physical attributes of the

control point. For example a 12 Channel load controller could be addressed as Box 1 and will always have 12 Physical Channels. These Channels are physically different from the Channels in 12 Channel load controller Box 2. Physical addresses are also used for reporting system diagnostic information related to hardware operation. Similarly for a user interface panel, a Device Type, Box Number and Physical button number are used for addressing the different input options. Physical addressing is also used to obtain operating parameter variables from specific devices. An example of this is a technique that can be adopted with a sensor. Sensors are normally configured to directly issue commands when particular lighting levels are reached or movement is detected. However, in certain projects it may be necessary to create separate control routines external from the sensor based on the lighting level sensed or occupancy status detected. This can be achieved by directly addressing the sensor with physical messages, thus bypassing the device configuration. This type of message could directly query the sensor for status information of occupancy. This feature is typically used when a monitoring system is added to the Philips Dynalite installation such as airconditioning control systems.

logical Load controller output channels and user control panel buttons are generally configured to logical Areas, independent of their physical characteristics i.e. the device they are connected to. This logical overlay enables control points to be grouped regardless of their physical association. A Logical Channel is a nominated Physical Channel that is assigned to an Area. Multiple physical channels in different load controllers can be grouped together into logical areas for network addressing requirements. This allows the Dynet network to control many different physical channels with one network message. The Philips Dynalite system can support up to 65,535 Areas and each Area up to 65,535 Logical Channels. It is also possible to assign more than one Physical Channel to a single Logical area.

In a lighting control

application, consider the scenario of a large room with 9 Physical Channels driving downlights along the length of the wall.

All of these Physical Channels can be assigned to just one Logical area.

This

simplifies operation of large installations, as the end-user only has to make adjustments to one channel. Page 2 of 11


The Philips Dynalite system can be divided into smaller subsections using logical addressing. Consider the example of a dimmer that supplies lighting circuits to two rooms, with a user control panel in each room. The controller lighting circuits and the control plate in Room 1 would be configured as Area 2, and the controller lighting circuits and the control plate in Room 2 would be configured as Area 3. The end result would be that the control plate set to Area 2 would only control or program circuits designated Area 2 and the control plate set to Area 3 would only control or program circuits designated Area 3, so the two rooms will operate independently of each other.

1 Phase 40A

DLE410

Office 1

Load (Outputs) CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Office 2

Area 2 Logical Channel 1

Area 3 Logical Channel 2

CP1

Logical Channel 1

Logical Channel 2

CP2

The ability to logically bind individual control channels into groups is essential in installations involving a large number of channels. Without this facility it would not be practical to view and configure the control channels within a project as they would need to be addressed individually. Configuration and maintenance of systems that do not allow for physical channels to be grouped into logical areas can therefore become quite cumbersome and time consuming to configure or edit requested changes.

preset states During commissioning each Philips Dynalite load controller may be configured with a number of output states, which are referred to as Presets. Most load controllers will typically accommodate up to 170 presets. The preset defines a specific output level for each channel of the controller.

Scene 1 1

Scene 2

Scene 3

Scene 4

OFF

2 3 4

Prog

The illustration above is a typical lighting control application where different intensities of the lighting are required for each of the four channels. These are set and stored in the controller‟s memory during commissioning. It is then possible to “recall” these settings from the controller‟s memory from a single


Page 3 of 11

network message at the touch of a button or at predetermined times, from a timer clock or automatically from an integrated building management system. A typical application for this approach would be in a hotel coffee shop, where the proprietor requires a pre-determined lighting “scene” for breakfast, another for lunch, one for dinner and another for suppertime. These settings can be preset and then simply recalled at the touch of a button. The time for the change to fade from one scene to another may also be preset and stored in memory. This way the patrons do not feel any visual discomfort when the lighting changes from one mood to another over, say, 10 minutes and all the lighting channels will change at the same time.

operating concepts The Philips Dynalite system can be controlled in several different ways, dependent on application requirements. Output changes can be achieved using Area Preset or Channel Level command messages. The most common approach is Area Preset control where Preset states stored within the controller are recalled.

Area Preset command messages will affect all control points that are assigned to the

respective message Area. An example of this would be a button press on a user control panel that is configured to issue an Area Preset command, say Area 1 go to Preset 1 over 5 seconds.

All load

controllers with channels assigned to Area 1 would change from their current preset to preset 1 output state in five seconds. Status indicators on all user control panels with buttons assigned to Area 1 Preset 1 will also follow accordingly. This network interaction of all devices responding to the same message allows for simpler commissioning as only one network message is needed to instigate changes in multiple devices, either load controllers or user interfaces. Preset control is ideally suited to applications where a large number of channels are to be controlled in a single area. The ability to recall a preset scene affecting multiple load channels in one area with a single network message is critical in architectural lighting applications. Systems that do not include provision to store presets or require multiple network messages to achieve a state or scene change may produce a discernable cascade effect as the channels sequentially receive individual level commands. This often produces an undesirable „mexican-wave‟ effect and network traffic complications. If required, channel Level command messages can also be used to affect output change on a specific Channel within a defined Area. An example of this would be a user control panel button configured to issue the message Area 1 Channel 1 go to 50% over 5 seconds. All load controller channels assigned to Area 1 Channel 1 would go to 50% output in 5 seconds. This method can be used where individual channel control is required and the number of channels is low. It is typically used in a home or small office environments where the user wishes to manually change the load controller output levels.

Page 4 of 11


programmable logic control All Philips Dynalite user interface devices also incorporate programmable logic control functionality. Using Envision software it is possible to author and embed complex programs within these devices that use arithmetic, sequential and conditional logic functions. These programs are referred to as tasks. Tasks can be triggered from within a device or from another device on the same network. Tasks are often used in applications where a single input or user interface action is required to deliver control over multiple areas. An example in architectural lighting applications would be a “welcome” function on a user control panel located at an entry point to a residence or office. When operated, the task issues a sequence of area preset commands required to illuminate an access path through the installation.

system commands The Philips Dynalite system utilises a range of commands that can be assigned to any user interface control or device input during system configuration. The assigned command is issued on the DyNet network when a corresponding user or input action occurs. The following table summarises the range of control commands that are commonly used. Preset Recall Commands Set Area/Channel to Preset

Recall Preset # for all Channels assigned to logical Area # in # seconds

Set Area/Channel to Off

Set all Channels assigned to logical Area # to off in # seconds

Level Recall Messages Set Area/ Channel to Level

Set all Channels or Channel # in logical Area # to Level # over # seconds

Ramping Commands Ramp Area/Channel Up

Start Ramping all Channels or Channel # toward 100% at a # ramp rate

Ramp Area/Channel Down

Start Ramping all Channels or Channel # toward 0% at a # ramp rate

Stop Ramping Area/Channel

Stop all Channels or Channel # in logical Area # from ramping

Stop Ramping Area/Channel And

Stop all Channels or Channel # in logical Area # from ramping and program

Programme Preset

current levels to preset

Area Control Commands Program Levels to Preset

Save present output Levels in logical Area # to current Preset

Set area to Panic Mode

Set all channels in logical Area # to the Panic Preset, disable and lock all user interface panels assigned to the respective logical Area

Revert Area to Unpanic Mode

Unlock and enable all user interface panels in logical Area #

Enable/Disable Panels

Enable/Disable all user interface panel buttons assigned to logical Area #

Enable/Disable Motion Detectors

Enable/Disable motion detectors assigned to logical Area #

Enable/Disable Photo Electric

Enable/Disable all photo electric detectors assigned to logical Area #

Detectors Set Area Preset Offset

Apply offset of # to all future Preset messages received by logical Area #


Page 5 of 11

Set/Clear Area Links

Set/ Clear area links between channels assigned to logical Area #

Status Commands Area Status Request/Reply Current Preset

Request current Preset in logical Area #. System replies with current Preset # for respective logical Area #.

Request/Reply Current Area Link

Request current area links between channels assigned to logical Area #

State Channel Status Request/Reply Channel Level

Request current Channel Level # for logical Channel # in logical Area #. System replies with current Channel Level # for respective logical Channel # in respective logical Area #

The Philips Dynalite system supports many commands beyond those outlined above. Further details are available on request.

global functions It is possible to send every area on a network to a single Preset using Area 0 (zero) as the addressed Area. There are implications when adopting this method where different third-party devices are in use such as curtains etc. For this reason Preset messages to specified Areas are the preferred method of global control.

combining control spaces Applications where de-mountable partitions or removable walls are being used (typically in areas such as hotel ballrooms, training rooms and conference centres) will require the control system to combine and separate lighting groups. It is usual that each space has its own user control panel. When the partitions are opened or closed, thus dividing a room, it is most important that the control system for the lighting should also combine or segregate in harmony with the partition status. In practice this means that when a room is divided, the control panel in one section must not be able to control the lighting in another section. However, as soon as the partition is opened, both control panels should work in parallel. This completely automates the room-combining function, so the user does not have to worry about configuring the system to suit the current arrangement. Philips Dynalite‟s supports Join or Area Link functions can be used to combine or separate control groups in these applications. The Join function is suitable for applications where there are a small number of separate sections involved. The Join function enables an Area to be divided into a number of sub sections. Sub sections can be combined and separated using the appropriate Join command. Area linking should be used in applications involving a large number of sections.

This function modifies the load controllers to

temporarily assign channels to more than one Area. With area linking, it is possible to create temporary control links between a total of 24 independent Areas with two-way control from each panel within the area that is being linked. The obvious main difference between this method and Join is the ability of Page 6 of 11


area link to combine a greater number of areas to work together as one larger area. A dedicated Base Link Area can also be used to act as a global area for Channels assigned to that Base Link Area and is useful as a global control for a block of Areas. The channels to be controlled are assigned during commissioning and can be in one of the 24 areas above the dedicated Base Link Area. Area linking is uni-directional, so if areas 7 and 10 for example, are to work in tandem there must be two area link messages sent; one message to link area 7 to area 10 and one message to link area 10 to area 7. In the example below areas 7-12 are all independent areas that can be controlled with standard preset messages. Assigning them to base link area 6 means that if and when required, any of the six areas shown can be linked to any of the other areas causing it to listen to another area‟s messages as well as its own. It could be possible; for example, if all areas indicated by base link area 6 were to be used together for a function, all the areas could be linked and controlled together with a single DyNet message.

Area 14

Area 2 Area 9

Base Area 6

Area 3

Area 7

Area 10 Area 13

Area 4 Area 8 Area 5

Area 11 Area 12

Area linking can also be used to provide a pseudo global Area other than Area 0. It is possible to create a pathway of light through a number of different areas by sending a single control message to the base link area.

network watchdog Fail safe operation of the Philips Dynalite system can be maintained through the Network Watchdog feature. This involves broadcasting a special data packet (the Watchdog Tick) to all load controllers across the network at programmed intervals. If a particular controller does not receive these messages within a predefined period, the controller will default to an assigned panic preset or to a specific preset stored in the load controller. This ensures that all controllers revert to a safe operating state should any part of the network cabling be physically severed, or there is a load controller failure.


Page 7 of 11

status indicator tracking All user control panels incorporate LED status indicators on all buttons that can be used to indicate the current preset state of an Area. When a Preset message is transmitted on the network, any indicators will illuminate on any user control panel button that is also assigned to that Area Preset automatically and without the need for additional network messages. Indicators for buttons assigned to other presets within the same Area will turn off. In this way the panels will always indicate the current state of an area. In some circumstances it may be necessary to change the state of some or all button status indicators on a user control panel.

The Philips Dynalite system enables status indicators to be controlled

independently using an appropriate physical command message. It is also possible to change the state of specific button status indicators while leaving others in their current state.

diagnostic functions The Philips Dynalite system also supports a number of advanced diagnostic functions, which include Device Online/Offline status, Circuit Breaker Trip Reporting and Circuit Run Time Tracking. Device Online/Offline status enables all devices to be periodically polled to determine if they are visible on the network and operating normally. Invoking this function in Envision software ensures that network or device failures are identified promptly. Load controllers that incorporate the Circuit Breaker Trip reporting function will broadcast a message on the DyNet network when a load circuit breaker on the controller trips. The message identifies the Physical device and channel affected by the tripped circuit breaker. These messages can be used to alert maintenance personnel of faults so that remedial action can be promptly carried out. Controllers that support Circuit Run Time tracking will continuously record the accumulated operating time for each output channel.

Run time data for each controller can be queried or reset at any time.

This information can be used by a site management system for scheduling periodic maintenance, such as lamp replacement intervals on lighting fixtures.

the physical network Philips Dynalite systems utilise RS485 as its physical network, which is an industry standard method of data transmission as detailed in the TIA/EIA-485-A specification, with some variations.

(For more

information on the TIA/EIA-485-A specification: www.tiaonline.org) The TIA/EIA-485-A specification defines a UL (Unit Load), which declares that an RS485 driver must be able to drive 32 ULs. This means that an RS485 network supports 32 nodes, when each node bears a unit Page 8 of 11


load on the line. Philips Dynalite products use 1/8 UL drivers and we recommend up to 128 devices on a network segment. Another important variation from the TIA/EIA-485-A specification is the addition of an extra conductor that carries a DC supply, which is generated by an integral power supply contained within all mains powered load control devices which is used to energise network devices that are not connect to mains power, such as motion detectors, wall mounted control panels and timer clocks. Figure 1: Typical small DyNet Network

Devices are simply connected with a general purpose 3 twisted pair and shield data cable that loops around to all devices as depicted in Figure 1. If using CAT5 cable the 4th pair can be left as a spare or used as a drain wire. The connections are as follows: Terminal

Cable

Recommended Colour Coding

Shield

Drain wire (or CAT5 spare pair)

Shield (or Brown pair)

GND

1 pair paralleled

Green pair

D+

½ pair

Blue

D-

½ pair

Blue / White

+12V

1 pair paralleled

Orange pair

Note the conductors that carry the DC supply are both wires in the pair paralleled. This is to avoid the DC supply suffering voltage drop on long cable runs. A 5-way pressure pad terminal strip is provided on devices for data cable termination. All devices also have RJ12 connector for temporary connection for commissioning. Some DIN rail load controllers support two RJ12 connectors for faster termination within the distribution board.


Page 9 of 11

Some sites require far more devices than the 128 maximum allowed on a single network. A typical application is a multi story building, with each floor containing a network of devices. The network segment for each floor is called a Spur. All spurs are joined together via a Trunk, which is quite often installed in a riser, linking all floors together.

Larger DyNet Network utilising trunk & spur technology

Each of the floors can run an independent sub-network that does not require any input from other devices. With each of the floor sub-networks being connected together by bridges on the trunk site-wide network messages can be sent that will affect the whole project, allowing the entire system to work together as one. Typically the Trunk is where computer head-end software or BMS will be connected so there is full access to all the required components of the network. Note the spurs do not directly connect to the trunk, but are connected via Network Bridges. A Network Bridge has two RS485 ports that are optically isolated from each other, which will assist to isolate any faults to a single spur only and also provide galvanic isolation. The use of Network Bridges allows the maximum number of devices on a single network to be 16,776,960. Network Bridges may also be used as repeaters when cable runs exceed 1,000 metres. In addition to optical isolation, the Network Bridge can also be configured as a network filter for stopping unrelated messages being transmitted onto irrelevant sections of the network, therefore reducing the number of network messages. The Gateways can also be used to run task on a floor so that when it receives a message from the truck requesting the system

Page 10 of 11


change to “After hours” mode, the gateway can then send out the required messages on the sub-floor network to comply.

dynet 2 protocol properties Packet Length:

Variable, 12 to 1024 bytes

Integrity Checking:

16 bit Fletcher Checksum

Baudrate:

9600 baud to 460800 baud (device dependant)

Data Word Format:

8 bit data, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, no parity (8N1)

Message Tracking:

Source network address embedded in each packet

Logical Areas:

65534, 0 = All Areas

Logical Presets per Area:

65519 editable, 16 predefined

Logical Channels per Area

65534, 0 = All Channels

Fade times per message:

0 to 23.3 hours @ 100mS resolution

Physical Channels per device:

65534, 0 = All Channels

Physical Device Types:

254

Physical Box Numbers per Device Type:

65535



Page 11 of 11

technical guide emergency lighting This application guide contains information on: q Non-maintained emergency luminaires  Maintained emergency luminaires



Sustained emergency luminaires



Testing emergency lighting



Egress mode upon changeover to a standby generator



Load shedding upon changeover to a standby generator



Automatically bypassing circuits from a load controller



Glossary of emergency lighting terms



There is a common requirement for emergency lighting to be used alongside general lighting connected to a control system. There are a few different ways of achieving this, the most appropriate method is dependent on the type of emergency lighting fixture and control equipment used. Following is a description of several different techniques and their respective deployment methods. Sometimes it will be necessary to combine two or more techniques to achieve the desired outcome.

self-contained luminaires There are three common types of Self Contained Luminaires (also known as Single Point Luminaires):

maintained luminaires This is an exit or emergency luminaire, where the lamps used for emergency lighting also operate under normal supply. The lamps used in these luminaires are often fluorescent, with a dimmable ballast and can be controlled in exactly the same manner as a normal dimmable fluorescent luminaire.


Normal

L N E

Maintained Emergency Lighting Luminaire

Maintained Battery Pack

Neutral Dimmable Ballast Lamp

DALI / 1-10V / DSI DALI /1-10V / DSI

DALI / 1-10V / DSI

AUX

D-

+15V

D+

GND

SHIELD

µP

DyNet RS485

Maintained Luminaires have two line inputs. One is connected to the controlled lighting output of the load controller. The Maintained input is connected to the load side of the load controller‟s circuit breaker, which supplies power to charge the internal battery and to use as a signal to turn the lamp on in the event of a power

Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Emergency Lighting

Page 1 of 7

failure.

In this example the Maintained Luminaire is also used for Normal Lighting, it‟s ballast is

dimmable so ballast control lines are shown. Commonly used control protocols are DALI, DSI and 1-10V.

non-maintained luminaires This is an exit or emergency luminaire, where the lamps used for emergency lighting only operate when the normal supply fails. The lamps used in these luminaires are often incandescent such as the small “Spitfire” halogen lamp and the larger, sealed beam flood lamp units.


Maintained Emergency Lighting Luminaire

Normal

L N E

Maintained

Battery Pack

Neutral Dimmable Ballast Lamp

DALI / 1-10V / DSI DALI /1-10V / DSI

DALI / 1-10V / DSI

AUX

D-

+15V

D+

GND

SHIELD

µP

DyNet RS485

Non-Maintained Luminaires are connected to the load side of the load controller‟s circuit breaker, which supplies power to charge the internal battery and to use as a signal to turn the lamp on in the event of a power failure. This connection method allows full control of the normal lighting while providing for emergency lighting in the event of a circuit breaker trip or power supply failure.

sustained luminaires This is an exit or emergency luminaire with two or more lamps where at least one lamp operates in nonmaintained mode and is only illuminated when normal supply fails. The other lamp operates on the normal supply only. This is identical in functionality to having a Non-Maintained Luminaire and a Normal Luminaire both in the same housing.


L N E

Normal

L

Neutral

N

Maintained

Normal Lighting Luminaire Lamp

Non-Maintained Emergency Lighting Luminaire Lamp Battery Pack

Page 2 of 7

AUX

+15V

D-

D+

GND

SHIELD

µP

DyNet RS485


Sustained Luminaires have two line inputs. One is connected to the Normal lighting output of the load controller. The Sustained input is connected to the load side of the load controller‟s circuit breaker, which supplies power to charge the internal battery and to use as a signal to turn the lamp on in the event of a power failure. In this example the normal half of the sustained luminaire is used for normal lighting, it is dimmable through leading edge. This method can also be applied to dimmable ballast control lines that use protocols DALI, DSI and 1-10V.

essential supply load shedding Some sites are equipped with a standby generator, which will automatically start upon failure of normal supply and after operating parameters are reached, will switch part or all of the site from the normal supply circuit to the generator‟s output, resulting in the site being re-energised some 10 to 20 seconds after normal supply failure. Quite often the standby generator is coupled with a UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply), which ensures there is no power dropout during the changeover period. In theory, the lighting system should operate as it would on normal supply, but in practice it is often desirable to modify it‟s behaviour. Two common reasons for doing this are:



The Standby Generator does not have the power capacity required to operate the site normally. In this case it is desirable to place the lighting system into a load shedding mode.



The site should not be occupied while normal power is not available. In this case it is desirable to place the lighting system into an egress mode.

To change the operating mode, the lighting system must be made aware that the generator has now come online. This is typically carried out via a relay that actuates when the generator is online, (or sometimes via a relay that actuates when the normal supply fails) providing a dry contact signal to an input unit on the lighting control network, such as a DDMIDC8 Multifunction Input Interface. Once the dry contact signal is detected, the DDMIDC8 will then transmit a network message along Dynet to activate the required load shedding.

1 Phase 40 AMP Standby Generator

DBC410

Dry Contact

EL1

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

DDMIDC8

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Lighting Control Network


Page 3 of 7

egress mode To meet the load shedding requirements of the project the DDMIDC8 unit can lock out all control user interface devices such as wall mounted control panels, touchscreens, motion detectors etc, to prevent occupants from interfering the required action and selects a global egress lighting preset, which is predefined to illuminate egress paths and reduce lighting in workspaces to assist in alerting occupants that something is amiss. When normal power is restored the DDMIDC8 restores normal control functionality.

load shed mode The DDMIDC8 can instruct all load controllers to use a different set of presets than the normal ones. Consider the example of a room with two channels of lighting and a control panel that recalls four presets:

HIGH

MED

Panel

Normal Presets

Load Shed Presets

HIGH

1 - CH1= 100%, CH2 = 100%

5 - CH1= 60%, CH2 = 20%

MED

2 - CH1= 70%, CH2 = 70%

6 - CH1= 60%, CH2 = 20%

LOW

3 - CH1= 40%, CH2 = 40%

7 - CH1= 40%, CH2 = 20%

OFF

4 - CH1= 0%, CH2 = 0%

8 - CH1= 0%, CH2 = 0%

LOW

OFF

During normal operation, presets 1-4 are recalled from the control panel.

In load shed mode the

DDMIDC8 uses a part of the DyNet featureset called „Preset Offset‟, which instructs the load controllers to recall presets 5-8. This function can target a single or group of rooms or more commonly, the whole site. If it is desirable that no lighting is on at all in particular rooms in load shed mode, then all load shed presets are set to 0%. This method has the advantage of minimal impact on the site, as lighting levels in particular rooms are not disturbed if they are already off or at low levels.

maintaining circuits by bypassing load controllers When there are only a small number of circuits to be maintained when a site changes over to a standby generator or UPS, a simple solution is to bypass the lighting control system with contactors that connect the circuits to be maintained directly to the essential supply.

Page 4 of 7


Non-Essential Supply

Essential Supply

DBC410 EL1 Contactor

Lamp

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Load Controller CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

In this scenario the non-essential supply is used to hold a contactor closed, connecting the lamp to the load controller. When the non-essential supply fails the load controller will be de-energised as will the contactor, which will connect the lamp to the essential supply.

glossary of emergency lighting terms anti-panic area lighting - The part of emergency escape lighting provided to avoid panic and provide illumination allowing people to reach a place where an escape route can be identified. central battery system - An emergency lighting system where the exits and emergency lighting are supplied from a common power source when there is a power failure (usually for all the emergency luminaires on one lighting sub-circuit, but sometimes for all emergency luminaires in a complete building). combined mode - An exit or emergency luminaire with two or more lamps where at least one lamp operates in non-maintained mode. Typically refers to a two-lamp luminaire where one lamp operates on the normal supply only and the other only when normal supply fails. Also known as „Sustained Mode‟. emergency lighting - The lighting provided for use when the supply to the normal mains lighting installation fails. emergency luminaire - A luminaire designed for use in an emergency lighting system. Exits can serve as emergency luminaires if classified in accordance with the relevant local standard. Emergency luminaires can be designed to operate as both normal lighting and emergency.


Page 5 of 7

escape route lighting - Lighting provided to ensure that the means of escape can be effectively identified and safely used when a location is occupied. exit luminaire - An emergency luminaire designed to serve as an Exit sign. high risk task area lighting - Emergency lighting provided to ensure the safety of people involved in a potentially dangerous process or situation and to enable proper shut down procedures. luminaire - A lighting fixture, the housing of which includes items for fixing, protecting and operating the lamps. maintained luminaire - An exit or emergency luminaire where the lamps used for emergency lighting also operate under normal supply. non-maintained luminaire - An exit or emergency luminaire where the lamps used for emergency lighting only operate when the normal supply fails. normal lighting - Standard electric lighting luminaires operating from the normal supply. rated duration - The manufacturers declared duration for a battery operated emergency lighting unit, specifying the time for which it will operate after mains failure. This is normally one or three hours when fully charged. recharge period - The time necessary for the batteries to regain sufficient capacity to achieve their rated duration. self contained luminaire - An emergency luminaire or exit sign with all control gear and battery pack housed within the luminaire. Also known as a Single Point Luminaire. single point emergency lighting system - Emergency lighting system using self-contained emergency luminaires and exit signs. single point luminaire - An emergency luminaire or exit sign with all control gear and battery pack housed within the luminaire (also known as a Self Contained Luminaire). slave luminaire - An emergency luminaire without its own batteries, which is designed to work in conjunction with a central battery system. standby lighting - The part of emergency lighting that may be provided to enable normal activities to continue in the event of a mains supply failure. Page 6 of 7


sustained luminaire - An exit or emergency luminaire with two or more lamps where at least one lamp operates in non-maintained mode and only illuminates when normal supply fails.

The other lamp

operates on the normal supply only. Identical in functionality to having a Non-Maintained Luminaire and a Normal Luminaire both in the same housing (also known as Combined Mode).



Page 7 of 7

technical guide

LED control overview

Offering exceptional life, versatile control flexibility and unlimited colour mixing potential, LED sources are becoming increasingly prevalent in architectural lighting applications. The vast range of LED fittings and sources now available provides a multitude of creative illumination design possibilities. Harnessing this potential requires a sophisticated control system. Philips Dynalite has responded to this need and developed a comprehensive range of controllers, designed to directly connect and drive most popular conventions of LED fittings and sources. This guide outlines LED fitting circuit design concepts and provides instruction on selecting appropriate dimming control solutions.

LED fundamentals Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are semi-conductor devices that emit photon energy (light) when an electrical current is passed through them. Detailed below is the electrical symbol that is commonly used to represent an LED.

Anode(+)

Cathode(-)

Like any diode, LEDs pass current in one direction only, from Anode to Cathode and block current in the reverse direction. To produce light a voltage needs to be applied, which exceeds the LED’s internal voltage drop (VF) in order for current to flow. VF is generally in the range of 0.7 – 4V and varies depending upon the material composition of the LED. The graph below plots the characteristic of a Lumileds Luxeon LED in the light emitting range. If the applied voltage is less than VF (about 3.2V) then current will not flow and the LED will not emit light.

Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control

Page 1 of 10

The light output level or brightness of an LED is generally directly proportional to the magnitude of forward current (IF). (See figure below)

LEDs are also designed to deliver optimum performance at their rated nominal current. Typical nominal current ratings for LEDs used in fittings generally range upward from 20mA through to 350mA. More recent technological developments on ultra-bright LEDs have also seen the release of products with nominal current ratings up to 1A. The current through an LED should never exceed the device’s nominal rating, otherwise permanent damage may result. For this reason, provision must be included with an LED fitting or the controller supplying the LED fitting, to regulate diode current to the correct level.

diode current regulation The simplest method of driving an LED is to apply a DC voltage Vs to the LED with a resistor R in series. This will control the current and protect the LED. The forward current (IF) can be controlled by selecting a suitable resistor.

R IF = (VS – VF)/R For the Luxeon LED above to run from a 12V supply at 350mA with a VF of 3V, it would require a resistor value of: R = (VS – VF)/IF = (12 – 3)/0.35 = 25.7 ohms The nearest standard value resistor value is 27 ohms. The power dissipated in this resistor would be: P=VxI

= (VS – VF) x IF = (12 – 3) x 0.35 = 3.15 W

Page 2 of 10


The LED uses 0.35 X 3 = 1.05 W This circuit delivers an efficiency of 1.05/(1.05 + 3.15) = 25 % Although series resistance can provide a convenient means of regulating current, there are often undesirable energy-efficiency implications as noted from the calculations above. There is also another major disadvantage to using this method; at the manufacturing stage, LEDs are sorted into ranges (or bins) of VF which is measured at a constant current. Each bin is then supplied as a specific brightness; however there are variations in each range.

The table above relates to the Lumileds Luxeon LED that is designed to be driven at a constant current of 350mA. LED fittings commonly contain many LEDs that are connected in series and parallel arrays. If these LEDs were driven by a constant voltage supply the variation of up to 1.2V between VF(min) and VF(max) in two parallel branches, which is nearly 30% of VF(typ), would result in noticeably different brightness levels of LEDs across the array. It is possible to provide some compensation for this by including a current limiting resistor in each branch so that any variation in VF has a less significant impact on branch current. Another method of driving an LED is to include a constant current regulator, which eliminates any variations due to inconsistencies in VF. To create a constant current regulator, a closed loop sensing circuit is required to monitor the current. This generally involves a sense resistor in series with the LEDs to determine the level of current. Discrete three terminal regulators such as the Motorola LM317 are often used for this purpose as outlined in the diagram below. ADJ IN

LM317

OUT

R Sense

The LM317 maintains 1.25V between VOUT and VADJ, with IADJ negligible and constant.


Page 3 of 10

Therefore the current though the LEDs is: I = 1.25/Rsense For a 350 mA LED Rsense would be 1.25/0.35 = 3.6 Ohms When controlling multiple LEDs from a single constant current source, the LEDs should be connected in series to ensure the current in each LED is identical. If LEDs are connected in parallel the variation in VF will again lead to different currents and therefore different brightness in each branch. As outlined previously, this can be improved by including a current limiting resistor in each branch so that any variation in VF has a less significant impact on branch current. However in this case if an LED in one branch of a parallel array fails to an open circuit state, the current normally delivered to that branch will be driven through the other branches causing the LEDs to operate above their rated current and potentially fail.

LED dimming It is possible to dim LEDs by simply reducing the current through the device. However, operating an LED below rated nominal current can result in a number of undesirable effects such as colour shift.

An

alternative to simple current regulation is Pulse Width Modulation (PWM). This technique dims the LED by supplying the nominal current at a variable duty cycle, which enables a much greater dimming range. 50% brightness is achieved with a 50% duty cycle. The frequency of the PWM is generally 100 Hz or greater, so that flicker is not discernable by the human eye. The following graphs illustrate PWM output for a range of dimming levels.

V

30%

V

50%

t V

70%

t V

t

100%

t

All Philips Dynalite controllers dim LED loads using pulse width modulation (PWM) ensuring that LEDs are always driven at the correct forward current. Page 4 of 10


LED circuit modes The circuit configuration of LED fittings can be broadly classified in two basic types – current mode and voltage mode. Voltage mode LED fittings incorporate integral current regulation circuitry and are designed for connection to a nominal voltage supply. Following is the circuit diagram for a typical voltage mode LED fitting.

Supply: 24VDC

ADJ IN

LM317

OUT

3.6O 1W 1%

Current mode LED fittings have no internal current regulation and therefore must be connected to a constant current supply. Following is the circuit diagram for a typical current mode LED fitting.

Supply: 350mA

The data sheet provided for an LED fitting will generally indicate whether it is a current or voltage mode device. Philips Dynalite produces fully dimmable controllers for both types of load.

common orientation LED fittings often incorporate more than one branch circuit. This is quite prevalent with colour mix fittings that have a circuit for each primary colour (RGB). One end of each circuit is generally connected together to form a common. The orientation of the common will of course vary depending on which end of the circuits are connected together. The orientation of an LED controller and LED fitting must match to ensure correct operation. For this purpose LED fittings and LED controllers are broadly classified as either common anode or common cathode. Common anode fittings as the name suggests, incorporate a common connected to the anode end of each LED circuit as illustrated below. Therefore the individual output channel polarity of common anode controllers must be negative with a positive common.


Page 5 of 10

CH1 CH2 CH3 COM

Conversely, common cathode fittings incorporate a common connected to the cathode end of each LED circuit. In this case the individual output channel polarity of common cathode controllers must be positive with a negative common.

CH1 CH2 CH3 COM

In both cases the common is not necessarily at ground potential and should therefore never be connected to a supply ground at any point. The orientation of proprietary LED fittings currently available is predominantly common anode. For this reason Dynalite LED controllers are designed to provide common anode output. Common cathode configuration is available as an option on certain Dynalite LED controllers. Please refer to product data sheet for specific option detail.

controller selection - voltage mode fittings Selecting a suitable controller for voltage mode fittings is a straightforward process. First it is necessary to select a controller that can deliver the nominal fitting voltage. The data sheet for a typical constant voltage fitting will generally include values for the power consumed by the fitting and also the required nominal voltage VF. Certain Philips Dynalite controllers which incorporate an integral power supply deliver a specific output voltage i.e. 24VDC, in line with popular nominal voltage conventions. Other Philips Dynalite controllers utilise external power supplies permitting a range of output voltages dependant upon the voltage of the external power supply. For multi-circuit fittings the common orientation should also be confirmed as compatible with the controller output. Finally, the controller channel output current capacity should be selected to exceed the connected load. The total load can be easily calculated by multiplying the total number of fittings per channel by the current per fitting. If only the power rating of the fitting is available the following expression can be used:

Page 6 of 10


IT =

n x PF VN

IT = Total current per channel PF = Power rating of LED fitting VN = Nominal voltage of fitting n = Number of LED fittings per channel

The controller selection process for voltage mode fittings can be summarised as follows:



Select output voltage to match fitting nominal voltage.



For multi-circuit LED fittings confirm common orientation aligns with controller.



Select output current rating to exceed connected load.

The following table summarises the current range of Philips Dynalite voltage mode controllers. Item Code Controller Voltage Common Orientation

DDLEDC401

DDLEDC605

24VDC,

18-32VDC,

12VDC (optional)

12-15VDC selectable

Common anode

Common anode

Common cathode (optional) Channels

4

Output current per channel

6

1A

5A Total controller load 20A

Power supply

Integral mains 240VAC

External safety extra low voltage

DIN Rail

DIN Rail

Housing

controller selection - current mode fittings The considerations for selecting an appropriate controller for current mode fittings relate more to the controller’s internal capacity to dissipate energy. This is because a constant current driver regulates the current flow through the LED circuit by effectively absorbing any excess voltage to maintain the nominal current level. In general, drive circuit internal power dissipation and thus heat generation is inversely proportional to the number of LEDs in series. Circuits with fewer LEDs in series will have greater heat generation in the drive circuit for a specific supply voltage. Therefore it is ideal to be aware of the power dissipation limits of the controller during the fitting design process. The first step in selecting a suitable controller is to determine the appropriate supply voltage and confirm it falls within the maximum and minimum limits applicable for the controller. Following are calculations for determining these limits. Maximum Supply Voltage


Page 7 of 10

VS max = PC + (n x VF) or VC max, whichever is the lesser ID VS max = Maximum supply voltage PC = Max controller internal power dissipation per channel ID = Nominal LED current n = Number of diodes in series per channel VF = LED forward voltage VC max = Maximum controller voltage Minimum Supply Voltage VS min = 4 + (n x VF) or 12VDC, whichever is the greater VS min = Minimum supply voltage n = Number of diodes in series per channel VF = LED forward voltage Once again, for multi-circuit fittings the common orientation should be confirmed as compatible with the controller output. The final step is to calculate the controller internal power dissipation and ensure it is within the controller’s limits. Following is the expression that should be used to determine this. PD = (VS - (VF x n)) x ID PD = Power dissipation per channel VS = Supply voltage VF = Diode forward voltage n = Number of diodes in series per channel ID = Nominal diode current It is sometimes necessary to increase the number of LEDs or introduce Zener diodes in series to increase the total VF and therefore reduce the internal power dissipation. The controller selection process for current mode fittings can be summarised as follows:



Confirm required supply voltage is within acceptable limits for the controller.



For multi circuit LED fittings confirm common orientation aligns with controller.



Calculate and ensure internal power dissipation is within controller limits.

Page 8 of 10


The following table summarizes the range of Philips Dynalite current mode controllers. Item Code Controller Voltage

DLEDC-48

DDLEDC60035

36VDC

18-32VDC, 12-15VDC selectable

Common Orientation

Common anode

Channels Nominal Output Current Max internal power dissipation

Common anode

48 (16xRGB)

6

17-50mA software adjustable

350mA

0.4 Watts per individual channel

6 Watts combined total for consecutive pairs of channels (Ch 1&2, Ch 3&4, Ch 5&6). 4 Watts per individual channel.18 Watts box total

Power Supply

Integral mains 240VAC

External safety extra low voltage

Wall Mount

DIN Rail

Housing

current mode controller alternatives Current mode fittings can be driven by a voltage mode controller if a current regulator such as the LM317 is included in the load circuit. The advantage of this is that the voltage mode controllers can deliver more power than constant current controllers and therefore more fittings can be driven from the one controller. The following circuit diagrams demonstrate the capacity of each controller to drive multiple current mode LED arrays.

CH1 ADJ

COM

IN

LM317

OUT

8.2O 0.25W 1%

CH2 ADJ

COM

IN

LM317

OUT

8.2O 0.25W 1%

CH3 ADJ

COM

IN

LM317

OUT

8.2O 0.25W 1%

CH4 ADJ

COM

IN

LM317

OUT

8.2O 0.25W 1%

CH5 ADJ

COM

IN

LM317

OUT

8.2O 0.25W 1%

CH6 COM

Supply: 28-30VDC 5A

+ E

LED Fitting, 25 x Nichia NFSW036T LEDs

µP

AUX

D-

+15V

D+

GND

Shield

DDLEDC605 DyNet/DMX512 RS485

The DDLEDC605 can drive up to a total of 20A at 24V – A total of 480W including dissipated power.


Page 9 of 10

CH1 ADJ

COM

IN

LM317

RED OUT

3.6O 1W 1%

CH2 ADJ

COM

IN

LM317

GREEN OUT

3.6O 1W 1%

CH3 ADJ

COM

IN

LM317

BLUE OUT

3.6O 1W 1%

CH4 COM

Supply: A 230V 1A N 1 Phase E

µP

AUX

D-

+15V

D+

GND

Shield


The DDLEDC401 can drive up to a total of 4A at 24V – A total of 96W including dissipated power. CH1 RED

COM CH2

GREEN

COM CH3

BLUE

COM CH4

RED

COM CH5

GREEN

COM CH6

BLUE

COM

A Supply: N 27VDC 2A E

µP

AUX

D-

+15V

D+

GND

Shield


The DDLEDC60035 can drive up to a total of 2.5A at 24V – A total of 60W including dissipated power.

 2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet, DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd. Luxeon is the registered trademark of Lumileds Lighting U.S., LLC. Motorola is the registered trademark of Motorola Inc.

Page 10 of 10


technical guide load compatibility overview Load compatibility is critical when specifying lighting and corresponding control systems. This document deals with each of the common lamp types and associated control gear. Where appropriate, different methods of control are also discussed.

mains voltage incandescent lamps

(including tungsten & tungsten-halogen sources)

All mains voltage incandescent lamps can be dimmed using Philips Dynalite leading and trailing edge load controllers. To calculate the connected load, simply multiply the lamp wattage by the number of lamps. As these are primarily resistive loads, power factor remains at unity. When specifying the current ratings of the lighting controllers, it is important to note the inrush current of cold filament lamps. This is usually in the region of 14 to 17 times the running current, but for a split second. Philips Dynalite protected controllers are fitted with 'Type C' MCB's. This means that in most cases it is possible to fully load the controller with no need to take account of de-rating. Philips Dynalite controllers are also fitted with a 'soft start' feature to protect lamps; however if large wattage (500W and above) lamps are being used, care should be taken to avoid fully loading the MCB's. A 10-15% margin is suggested to avoid any possibility of 'nuisance tripping' of the breakers.

low voltage tungsten-halogen & halogen-xenon lamps These lamps include burner lamps and reflector lamps, both dichroic and metal reflector types (MR11 & MR16). They have traditionally been dimmed via a suitably rated iron-core transformer and leading-edge phase-control Philips Dynalite Load Controller.

Every Philips Dynalite dimming controller has a

symmetrical output voltage waveform (the majority of 'economy' domestic wall-box dimmers do not guarantee that the output waveform will be symmetrical and could therefore damage the transformers). A wide variety of transformer types are now commonly available. These should be selected carefully and matched to the appropriate controller type and capacity from the Philips Dynalite range. Common transformer types include:

electronic – leading edge dimmable transformers In general, their losses are less than those of a traditional iron-core dimmer. Add 10% to the total lamp wattage on a circuit (then divide wattage by mains voltage to determine load current). This provides a margin for transformer losses when calculating circuit loadings.

See "Do's & Don'ts" following for

additional precautions.

Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Load Compatibility

Page 1 of 9

These transformers are for low voltage lighting applications. If there are multiple transformers on a dimmed lighting group, this can initiate a substantial spike when the circuit is switched on due to the cumulative effect of their input capacitors.

electronic – trailing edge dimmable transformers These transformers are intended for use only with trailing edge controllers. Their suitability should be documented in literature provided with the transformer or they should be labeled accordingly. These style of transformers are typically physically smaller is size making them more suitable for track-lighting applications or decretive low voltage lamp fittings. A de-rating factor of 10% should be included for transformer efficiency. Note: Trailing edge controllers can also be used on mains-voltage filament lamps and on most other electronic transformers, but not on iron core transformers.

electronic – non-dimmable transformers These transformers should not be connected to a dimming controller, unless the controller is configured as a switched output only or damage to the transformer may occur. These types of transformers should only be driven from a relay unit. A de-rating of 10% should be allowed for.

electronic – DSI/DALI/1-10V transformers These four wire transformers are operated in exactly the same manner as an HF fluorescent electronic ballast. Refer to the respective section under fluorescent lighting for compatibility details.

standard ferro-magnetic – ‘E&I’ (economy) transformers As the name implies, these transformers are constructed from two pieces of laminated steel cores, one shaped like an 'E'. The wire-winding bobbin is placed over the centre leg of the 'E' and the 'I' is then clamped over it alternately to close off the mechanical structure. These are perfectly acceptable for leading-edge dimming applications providing they are manufactured without defect and are used on a 'one transformer per lamp' basis.

Transformer losses of around 10% should be considered when

calculating actual loads. In particularly hot environments, it is appropriate to allow for 20% losses.

standard iron core, wire-wound – toroidal transformers These transformers are wound onto a doughnut shaped iron core. They are more difficult to wind than the 'E&I' type and so have a higher manufactured cost. They are generally quieter than the economy transformers, but can generate excessive heat and audible noise if the transformers are potted in epoxy. Toroidal transformers are popular for building into ELV downlights due to their physical shape. Leadingedge dimming controllers are suitable for their control.

Page 2 of 9


do’s and don’ts of dimming low voltage transformers When dimming low voltage lamps, Philips Dynalite recommends the specification of one lamp per transformer. There are several reasons for this:



In the event of transformer failure, only the single lamp is extinguished. The transformer is also readily accessible as it will be near the extinguished lamp.



If larger capacity transformers are used to control multiple lamps, any variances in cable length will be manifested in different luminous outputs; the longer the cable, the less light will be observed coming from the source.



Some transformers can be noisy when dimmed.

This is often the case for larger transformers

(especially 'E' and 'I' types), some electronic transformers and toroidal transformers that are potted in a fixture.



Large transformers are prone to nuisance tripping with MCB's at switch on, although the soft start features of Philips Dynalite controllers will minimise this risk. The problem is due to the highly inductive nature of the transformer coupled with the high inrush current of the lamps. Sometimes large transformers cannot be avoided for stretched-wire or parallel rod distribution systems. These transformers are usually a component part of the system and should have an integral provision for fast protection against overload or short circuit of the conductors.



Large wire-wound transformers have high energy losses and poor output voltage regulation.



Some transformers are not suitable for dimming. Please refer to the Philips Dynalite Transformer Compatibility Guide under the “Technical Support” link on the Philips Dynalite website for further information.



For effective phase control dimming, minimum loads may apply, depending on the transformer type or load characteristic of the connected lighting fixtures. Lighting circuits comprising a single low voltage fitting of 20W or less may exhibit some instability for this reason. Please refer to controller data sheets or consult a Philips Dynalite representative for advice on minimum loads.

Four-wire transformers (DALI, DSI, 1-10V) require a pair of cables for the control signal, in addition to the mains feed. Local supply regulations must be observed when wiring mains and control cables, as the control terminals on the transformers or controllers are not rated as SELV. Mains voltage must never be applied to the control signal terminals or cables.


Page 3 of 9

fluorescent lighting There are many different fluorescent lamp types available. As a general rule, those lamps with four pins are dimmable. Those lamps with two pins and integral starters or those with domestic BC or ES base are not dimmable. The dimming range of these lamps is a function of the fluorescent ballast connected to the lamp.

electronic dimmable DALI ballasts DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface) is a data protocol and transport mechanism that was jointly developed and specified by several manufacturers of lighting equipment. The common platform of DALI enables equipment from different manufacturers to be connected together. DALI is a step on from the DSI protocol, which is used by HF fluorescent ballasts. One of the main advantages that DALI has over earlier systems is that each device on a segment of data cable can be separately addressed, as DSI and 1-10V devices are not separately addressable and can only be controlled as a group. The net result is that to achieve similar control functionally, DALI requires less complex (and therefore less expensive) wiring topology than DSI or 1-10V devices. DALI distributes the control intelligence into each luminaire. This enables precise control when used in conjunction with appropriate Philips Dynalite devices and systems. A DIN-rail mounted Philips Dynalite DDBC120-DALI communicates on a single pair data cable to a "Universe" of up to 63 other DALI devices. The input to this Controller is standard DyNet RS485, thereby enabling seamless integration between the DALI devices downstream and a normal DyNet system upstream that could include intelligent wall mount control panels, sensors and an economical desktop browser interface. Unlike systems that have adopted DALI as the protocol for all devices, the Philips Dynalite approach does not reduce the number of DALI nodes with each additional sensor or wall mounted control panel.

DALI ballasts are individually

addressable and enable unique instruction about switching and illuminance to be conveyed to each lamp, each zone or each universe (64 nodes max. by definition) from a single instruction. The Philips Dynalite Controller is fully bi-directional, enabling critical status information from each luminaire to be reported elsewhere over the DyNet network. Circuit allocation and data wiring may be determined without reference to each other. Data cable is non-polarised, 2-core mains-rated cable with a maximum network length of approximately 300 metres (1.5mm2 cable). Each DALI universe must be commissioned, at which time up to 16 Groups may be assigned. This information is stored in each DALI ballast, as is the individual address, scene value and Power on level. Fade rates are very restricted in DALI, so they are undertaken in the flexible DyNet system.

Page 4 of 9


The Philips Dynalite DDBC120-DALI offers mains disconnection to the local universe by responding to the combined 'Off' state of all ballasts.

It then electrically disconnects Active supply from the load to

eliminate standby power consumption of ~7 VAR per ballast. This energy conservation measure can provide significant cost benefits in commercial installations where a large numbers of ballasts are installed. DALI control is phase independent.

The single phase power relay switching of the DBC120-DALI may be fed through a contactor for a multiphase universe. A de-rating of 10% should be allowed for.

electronic dimmable DSI ballasts Tridonic manufactures a popular fluorescent ballast type that operates on a proprietary digital protocol known as DSI.

Its control signal comprises an 8-bit asynchronous serial command string that is

transmitted at 1200 Baud. Philips Dynalite's analogue ballast controllers are software selectable to operate DSI type ballasts. These have the advantage of being addressable by the lighting controller and hence by the upstream DyNet network. Options include On & Off and dimming level. A maximum fade rate of 1.5 seconds is provided in the ballast. Slower fade rates are determined in the Philips Dynalite controller and are not visually perceptible. The ballast type determines the minimum Illuminance possible. In general 1% is achievable by most ballasts (due to our visual response, this does not appear to be as low as one might imagine). It is possible to leave the mains permanently connected to the ballast and use the DSI signal to switch the lamp off, but be aware that the DSI transformer consumes ~7 VAR per ballast while switched off. This may become an energy savings issue, especially in commercial sites with large numbers of ballasts. Note that this ballast requires a pair of cables for the control signal, in addition to the mains feed. Some DSI controllers, such as the Philips Dynalite DBC410 have an integral relay on each circuit, to switch off mains supply to the lighting circuit when set at 0%. A de-rating of 10% should be allowed for. DSI is a mid-range controllable ballast solution, but unlike DALI, lacks the ability to address luminaires individually. A separate data cable is required to connect from the Philips Dynalite Ballast Controller to each managed group of lights. This does not present a problem where large numbers of lights share a common controlled level. Control is generally in the forward direction; that is, from the controller to the load. While a single back-channel is afforded in the specification, it is not supported by all ballasts. Where feedback is available, it indicates lamp failure only.


Page 5 of 9

electronic dimmable 1-10V ballasts Many parts of the world still prefer this solution, due to its economy at the component level. Philips Dynalite has a wide range of Ballast Controllers for this application, including both DIN-rail mounted and conventional Black Box configurations (DDBC or DBC product code prefix). The primary disadvantage of "1-10 volt" dimming is the necessity to separately isolate supply to each switched zone; hence controllers range from 5 to 20 amps per channel in both single and 3-phase supply. A dedicated power sub-circuit and a control pair are provided for connection to each zone of lighting. The controllers also provide the necessary mains switching relays as required in 1-10 volt applications. A de-rating of 10% should be allowed for. The single pair data cable that controls 1-10-volt ballasts is also polarised. Accidental reversal of these cables to any single ballast greatly reduces the dimming range of all connected ballasts in the chain. If the chain is interrupted at any point, the fault-free side of the chain returns to full light output. There is no information fed back to the controller with this type of ballast. Most analogue ballasts are interchangeable, with the notable exception of proprietary '0-10 volt' ballasts that use zero volts to electronically switch off the lighting.

electronic ballasts - standard These ballasts are not dimmable, but can be controlled by relay controllers.

do’s and don’ts of dimming fluorescent lighting In new installations or when the lamps have been changed, the new lamps should be "burnt-in" by being switched full on for at least 100 hours before any attempt is made to switch off or dim them. This will improve the visual dimming performance and lamp life. Please check with the lamp manufacturer for specific advice. Due to the fact that different type and wattage lamps may have different dimming curves, it is advisable not to mix fixtures with different lamp types on the same dimmer channel.

cold cathode (glow discharge) lighting Cold cathode lighting is common in coffer lighting applications and in signage. It is most useful in areas where access for re-lamping is restricted as the tube life can exceed 80,000 hours. Neon lamps, as they are more commonly called, are available in three principle types, based on the Argon, Neon or Krypton gas that is used to fill the glass envelope. Their ability to be dimmed is dependent on the materials involved.

Page 6 of 9


Argon gas-filled tubes are the easiest to dim. Red Neon gas-filled tubes can be dimmed, but over a reduced range, with the tube diameter being significant to performance.

A minimum of 10mm is

required; the larger diameter, the better is the likely outcome for dimming. In general, Leading Edge Controllers are suitable for dimming cold cathode.

The best results are

obtained where the dimmer's output semiconductor is rated at or above 5 Amps (BTA41 or larger). Smaller controllers, such as the DDMC802 are not suitable. The dimmed channel concerned should be protected by an MCB.

cold-cathode transformers A transformer should be of electronic or iron core construction and approved by the manufacturer for dimming with a leading edge dimmer. If using a dimmable electronic transformer, de-rate the dimmer channel by 10%. If using an iron-core transformer, de-rate the dimmer channel by 60% and ensure that any power factor correction capacitors are removed. This should be checked carefully, as some types of transformers have the power factor correction capacitor buried inside the resin fill, making it difficult to remove. If the transformer is an OCP (Open Circuit Protection) type, ensure that it is suitable for dimming, as many OCP transformers are not.

This type of transformer has circuitry that will automatically

disconnect the transformer’s output in the event of a tube breakage.

cables GTO (gas tube oil ignition) cables should not be of the braided type. GTO cables between the neon and transformer should not be longer than 6 metres and separated from each other by at least 100mm. Avoid running GTO cables near metal or in metal conduits. If metal conduit must be used, try to use a non-ferrous alloy type.

discharge lamps (including metal halide, mercury vapour and high pressure sodium) These styles of lamps are traditionally switched only. When controlling these types of lamps it is important to use the larger rated relay devices such as the DDRC240FR to the DDRC1220FR units. The 20A relay units are better suited for handling the inrush requirements of this style of lamps. When calculating the REAL current for the switching device it is most important NOT to assume that the connected load can be calculated by multiplying the lamp wattage by the number of lamps.

For

example, a 150W Metal Halide lamp has a starting current of 2.4A. This level of current demand lasts for several minutes after switch on, so it is therefore essential that these loads be carefully calculated to avoid nuisance tripping of circuit breakers.


Page 7 of 9

Some manufactures of discharge lamps support dimming, this is done using protocols like 1-10V or DALI traditionally found in ballast dimming. If compatible then this style of lamp may be dimmed in the same way as florescent ballasts. Manufactures instructions of the control for these lamps should be carefully followed as incorrect use could damage the lamp or reduce its expected life span.

led lighting With the increasing rate of technological development on ultra-bright LED’s, luminaires utilising these sources are becoming more prevalent in architectural applications. There is now an extensive range of proprietary LED lighting fittings available in the market. Philips Dynalite LED controllers use the widely adopted pulse width modulation (PWM) technique to regulate lumen output of LED fixtures. As the name suggests this technique simply involves altering the on time duration of a clock or square wave supply to the fittings. LED fittings generally incorporate a number of LEDs connected in a series-parallel circuit array. There are a number of circuit designs that are emerging as popular conventions. Consideration of the circuit type is necessary when selecting a controller with the appropriate output, particularly when dimming is required. Following is an outline of circuit design attributes that are used to classify an LED fitting for controller selection. Mode

This relates to how LED current is biased. Voltage mode fittings incorporate integral current limiting devices and are designed for direct connection to a nominal supply voltage. Alternatively, current mode fittings do not include facility to limit current and therefore must be connected to a constant current supply.

Rated Input

Nominal supply voltage and current.

Configuration This applies to multi channel fittings (i.e. RGB) designed for colour mixing applications, and designates whether the channels are internally connected as common anode or common cathode. Philips Dynalite has developed dedicated LED controllers that cater to a wide range of fitting design types and it should be noted that mains voltage LED fittings are also available. Certain types of these mains voltage fittings include an integral regulating power supply with facility for a control input signal such as 0-10V and DALI. Dynalite ballast controllers may be readily used for these types of fittings in the same way as an electronically dimmable fluorescent luminaire. Mains voltage LED fittings without a control input may also be connected to a relay controller when simple on off control is required.

Page 8 of 9


Some mains powered LED fittings are compatible with leading or trailing edge dimming technologies. Care needs to be taken to make sure that the fittings are compatible. Some LED fittings will have a reduced dimming range and may produce a “flicker” when dimmed. This can be overcome by using Philips Dynalite editable dimming curves and an active load that is connected to the leading edge output channel. Some flicker may still be present from main supply instability.

2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited.


Page 9 of 9

technical guide programming methods overview The approach to programming a Philips Dynalite system can be broadly categorised as; system configuration, preset editing and function programming. This document outlines the various methods available for programming in all categories.

system configuration System configuration is the process of assigning base parameters for all devices.

This includes

designation of device network addresses, arranging controller output channels and user interface devices into logical groups and setting command actions for each point, i.e. user control panel button, dry contact input, sensor state etc.

preset editing Preset editing entails the setting of controller output channel levels for all output states or scenes required.

function programming Function programming involves the creation of control logic and routines for automated system operation. Typical examples would include provision of entry and egress scenarios, join or base link functions for combining partitioned areas in a ballroom etc. System configuration and function programming requires a personal computer attached to the products or the DyNet network via a DTK622-USB PC Node. The PC Node converts the RS485 DyNet into a serial communication format suitable for connection to a PC.

Philips Dynalite has developed a range of

intuitive software for complete configuration, operation and management, from ‘wizard’ style configuration tools through to comprehensive site management solutions.

A Philips Dynalite

representative should be consulted for advice on the most appropriate software for a specific application. For the purpose of providing an overview of Philips Dynalite system programming, this document will outline the Windows-based Envision configuration software. This application provides a comprehensive configuration and programming environment that enables the following parameters to be set;



Preset scenes



Logical channel numbers



Fade times



Join mask



Sequencing



Analogue options



Channel names



Dimmer curves



Timer clock events



Panic functions



Touchscreen programming



Non-dim options



Network address



Maximum & minimum level

Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Programming Methods

Page 1 of 8

When system configuration has been completed it is also possible to edit presets using a range of interface options. This enables users to make and save adjustments to lighting levels without the need for specialist knowledge or equipment. The popular interface options for user preset editing are also outlined in this document.

programming with Envision Envision is a Windows-based program that will run under the Windows 98, 2000, XP, Vista and Windows 7 operating systems. It is the ideal tool for larger systems and for those who prefer using Windowsbased programs. This graphics-based software is extremely powerful, whilst still being quick and easy-touse. The following screens are an example of some of the facilities offered by Envision.

Figure 1. Network View Dialogue Box

Figure 1 illustrates the physical view of an office installation. It displays all devices on the network, indicating the network box address for each device. Clicking any device in this view will show the device’s standard in a dialogue box. For a dimmer, this dialogue enables logical areas to be assigned to each channel. In addition, it is possible to set logical channels for each physical circuit in the dimmer. This is sometimes referred to as ‘softpatching’.

This dialogue

also enables channels to provide non-dimming switched on/off control.

Page 2 of 8

Figure 2. Configuration Dialogue Box


All other devices in a Philips Dynalite system are configured in a similar way. Clicking a ‘Universal Panel’ will show the configuration dialogue for that panel. The standard configuration dialogue for a Universal Panel enables the default area and fade-time to be set for the area it controls. From this dialogue, it is possible to custom configure each individual button on the panel.

This makes

available a number of custom features and allows a single wall mounted user control panel to control multiple panels. Having shown a number of the Figure 3. Advanced Configuration Dialogue Box

screens available in the Physical View where products

are

configured

specifically

for

an

installation, it is then possible to move into the Logical View, where preset scenes are set. The dialogue box below shows the logical screen for each of the areas in an office that employs dimming. Each of these buttons is a unique area on the network. By selecting a button, the program moves to the logical view of the lighting scene for that area.

Figure 4. Logical View Dialogue Box


Page 3 of 8

The logical view for the area has a ‘virtual’ fader for each logical channel in that area, a ‘virtual’ push button for each scene and several additional features designed to speed up programming of the lighting within the area. The dialogue below is for the ground floor main reception area of the office project. All the information needed for programming this area is displayed on one screen. The ‘Area Name’ is particularly useful when working on large and complex systems. In this example, there are 12 logical channels. Each channel has a virtual fader comprising a ‘knob’, up and down indicators and a % level display at the bottom of the fader. This displays in 1% increments from 0 to 100%.

An ‘X’ in this

Figure 5. Preset Editing Dialogue Box

position indicates an ‘ignore’ (or ‘don’t care’) setting. There are eight preset buttons. On selection of a button, the virtual faders immediately move to the set levels for each logical channel.

It is possible to program live, so that changes take immediate effect or

to ‘silent’ program, by selecting mute, so as not to disturb the occupants of a space. Once a preset has been programmed, it is then ‘saved’ into the dimmer(s) memory. To simplify the process of configuring a large number of dimmers to similar preset levels, the software utilises a ‘copy’ command. This enables any current scene to be copied and then saved as a new scene and modified. One of the major advantages of Envision is that it is possible to program settings off-site and simply download to the system once on-site. Refer to Envision Training Guide for more information on this software.

programming with user control panels ‘one-touch’ control panel The simplest form of effecting preset adjustments is through a ‘one-touch’ panel. This function can be applied to one or more channel and a complete logical area.

Page 4 of 8


STEP 1

A simple button push toggles between ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’.

STEP 2

Holding down the button raises and lowers the lighting circuit or circuits, which are connected to the button. To alternate between ‘UP” and ‘DOWN’, stop pushing for a moment, then hold down again. The level that is selected is saved and restored when the lights are turned off and then on again.

fader program panel Another convenient approach for preset adjustments is the use of ‘hold down’ programming on a fader panel. STEP 1

To program preset scenes, press ‘MANUAL’

STEP 2

Adjust channel levels using sliders.

STEP 3

Press and hold down the button to which the settings are to be stored for at least 5 seconds.

Repeat this process for the other

presets. The preset scenes are now stored and can be recalled by pressing the relevant buttons on this panel, or other panels in the same area.

programmable preset panel The programmable preset panel provides a compact and cost effective solution for adjusting lighting levels on multiple channels, within a single area.


Page 5 of 8

STEP 1

Select preset to be changed by pushing buttons 1 - 4. The button LED will indicate current scene.

STEP 2

Hold down the

PROGRAM

button until all button LEDs light up

(approximately five seconds).

The chosen preset button LED will

flash.

STEP 3

To increase or decrease the brightness of all channels at the same time, press the up, down or off button until the required brightness is reached.

STEP 4

To set the level of an individual channel, press the desired button, 1 – 4. The button LED will indicate which channel is selected. When more than 4 channels are to be set, press 1 twice for channel 5, press 2 twice to select channel 6, press 1 three times to get channel 9 etc. (Each press of the button increases the active channel number by 4.)

STEP 5

Press the

UP, DOWN

or

OFF

buttons until the lamps on the

selected channel reach the desired level. Select the next channel and change in the same way.

STEP 6

When all channels of the preset scene have been established, press

PROGRAM

again and the levels will be stored to the

current preset. To program another preset, repeat steps 16. Page 6 of 8


Notes: 1. There is no technical limit to the number of channels that can be programmed using this method.

In practice, it is suitable for up to around 16 channels.

Above that number,

programming using either the DPP601 portable programmer, or a laptop computer with Envision software. 2. In some applications, it may be necessary to prevent the programming function being used by unauthorised personnel. This can be achieved using a keylock to enable or disable the programming mode.

portable hand-held programmer The DPP601 portable programmer is ideal for those who do not wish to connect to the network via a laptop or find the local control panels too limited in their scope. The unit is lightweight, compact and simple-to-use.

A generous back-lit LCD screen

provides on-line information, confirming the currently selected scene number or name; channel number or name; % level of the selected scene; area number or name and the fade time.

Figure 6. DPP601 Portable Programmer

It is possible to select a scene, then ‘call up’ channels within that scene and set their levels, either using the ramp up/down keys, or by entering % levels on the keypad. Once the scene has been modified it can be saved to the dimmer’s memory. The DPP601 can be plugged into the DyNet network via a user control panel, programming point as provided on dimmers, or any existing programming socket.

touchscreen The DTP100 & DTP170 Touchscreens are versatile user interfaces that incorporate 255 pages, which can be customised to application requirements.

There are a

number of different ways a preset can be programmed using the DTP100 & DTP170. Dedicated pages can be configured to clearly represent the area being controlled and programming panels and slider panels can be Figure 7. Programming preset scenes using a DTK100 Touchscreen


emulated. The example below outlines a

Page 7 of 8

typical programming page for a meeting room.

This page can be password protected to prevent

unauthorised access. When the page opens the sliders will move to display the current levels of each channel in the room. 1. Select a preset scene to adjust using the buttons at the bottom of the page. 2. Move the sliders until the desired lighting level is reached. 3. Press the ’save’ button on the right hand side of the page to store the new levels into the load controller. These levels become the new preset.

 2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet, Envision and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Page 8 of 8


technical guide

systems integration overview

Integration between various control systems within projects, reduce end-users need to have multiple interactions to perform what seems like one task such as “play DVD” or “arm security system”. To perform this function, many different control system elements need to work together. By using different Philips Dynalite gateways, these elements can be coordinated together to produce a seamless performance. Philips Dynalite provides several different methods for interfacing with other services, such as building management systems (BMS), projector controllers and audio-visual controllers, blind motors and other third components. This guide outlines some examples of differing techniques.

DyNet over RS485 All Philips Dynalite products communicate using the DyNet protocol which uses RS285 for communication. A subset of Dynet commands has been made available to anyone wishing to directly communicate with the Philips Dynalite system. Many AV controller, alarm system and BMS vendors also make available software drivers that can communicate directly with the Philips Dynalite system using DyNet messages. This allows the system to be operated as an open protocol. The drawing below illustrates connection of a BMS directly onto the DyNet bus. In this method, command direct from the BMS server can be sent to the lighting control system.

To assist in the development of communications drivers for DyNet, we have developed an “Integrator‟s Handbook”, a copy of which is available on request from local Philips Dynalite dealers.

Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration

Page 1 of 9

DyNet over RS232 DyNet message packets can also be sent and received over RS232 networks. The Philips Dynalite DTK622232 unit is a passive network gateway that converts RS485 to RS232 for full duplex communication that allows AV systems that use RS232 to simply send Dynet commands directly. For more advanced integration that requires network message filtering or logical processing, the DMNG2322 gateway is ideal. This gateway has advanced features enabling it to receive custom RS232 data strings that can trigger a task or send a Dynet message on the RS485 port. An example of this is shown bellow. The device can also be used to send custom RS232 data strings to other third-party devices triggered from Dynet messages. This can allow third-party systems such as AV to be controlled from Philips Dynalite pushbutton panels.

LonWorks The Philips Dynalite DDNI-LON provides a LON interface to the DyNet network, via a TP/FT10 LonWorks port. Lighting SNVTs (standard network variable type) are supported, as well as user-defined types. The device can typically translate up to 100 presets in 30 areas.

Page 2 of 9


The diagram above illustrates the cascading of multiple DDNI-LON devices to accommodate a DyNet network with more than 30 areas. The device can also be used to trigger complex tasks for changing a project mode. For example, a BMS system manages the scheduled events and uses LON to communicate to the various systems throughout a project. A single LON message can be sent that can change the Philips Dynalite system to operate between “after hour” and “trading hours” mode. This can change the operation from panel function to sensor timer out, if required.

BACnet BACnet integration allows for BMS system to send commands to the Philips Dynalite system triggering functions and timed events. In a Philips Dynalite system that is of a trunk and spur topology, the BACnet gateway can be connected directly to the network trunk giving it access to all of the system devices. The BACnet protocol uses addressable points for communication; these addressing points can be adjusted by the BMS for triggering required functions such as timed events or the Philips Dynalite system for reporting back current system status. An example of the kinds of functions that can be achieved is when the BMS system enters “After hours” mode, a request can then be sent to the Philips Dynalite lighting control system via the BACnet protocol to turn off all the lighting on a particular floor. The lighting control system can then flash the lighting off, warning any occupants still on the floor that they need to interact their continuing occupation of the area by pressing an “afterhours” button or the lighting control system could use passive presence detectors for detecting occupants. If no occupants have indicated their presence, then the Philips Dynalite control system will switch off the lighting and report this back to the BMS so that the aircondition plant can also be automatically shut down. This kind of integration allows for one system to control many different elements within an area.

TCP/IP Internet-Ethernet Ethernet connectivity Philips Dynalite supports a wide range of Ethernet gateways for different mounting requirements. DNG100BT

Wall box mounted and mains powered

DDNG100BT

DIN rail mounted and mains powered

DMNG100BT

Modular mounted and network powered


Page 3 of 9

Using Ethernet gateways allows for networking multiple Dynet RS485 networks together or allows for integration to web-based systems. In a typical application of a high-rise office building, each floor will have its own Philips Dynalite system operating independent of each other. On each of the floors the network uses Dynet RS485 to communicate between the different devices. To coordinate the different floor systems together, each of the separate sub systems can be linked together via an Ethernet using gateways. A high speed Ethernet trunk is run between the floors of the building allowing for site-wide command to be sent while each of the floors use a network gateway to spur off and start the network. In applications where the distance between the Philips Dynalite devices exceeds the RS485 network limit, such as interconnecting separate buildings or linking control centres in a tunnel. These distances can be overcome by running fiber optic cables between the sites and having them connected together via Ethernet gateways. The Ethernet gateways also support the feature of providing remote control of a residential site via a web browser interface or Philip Dynalite DynamicTouch software. This remote control functionality can be made available from external locations by making the gateway visible on the Internet, as well as providing remote control within the dwelling via hand-held computing devices such as Palm Pilots, iPads and web tablets, via connection to a Wi-Fi hub.

Ethernet connectivity products Connection of Philips Dynalite RS485 to the Ethernet is achieved using one of the Ethernet Gateways. It can be configured to use the TCP/IP protocol and has an inbuilt web server that can be configured to serve up pages allowing control of the lighting control system via a web browser.

EnvisionManager Server software is designed to provide high-level integration and control options to a DyNet network via Ethernet. The DyNet network is connected to a server PC‟s COM or USB port and information can then be exchanged via client software running on the server PC or clients connecting remotely over the Ethernet network using TCP/IP.

Page 4 of 9


Integration to other services is made simple by the use of a set of calls for an industry standard DCOM interface. EnvisionManager can use client software such as Traypan which is an inexpensive solution for providing occupants of open plan office space with control over their local environment. TrayPan client software is provided with EnvisionManager and can provide control of the local lighting from the tool tray of desktop PC‟s. It uses the existing LAN to communicate with EnvisionManger server software. When used for occupancy detection, additional cost benefits can be made from not having the provision of local control panels and sensors that would otherwise be required. A web page with an ActiveX control is another inexpensive option of client control.

The optional

EnvisionManager Toolbox Software Development Kit provides a rapid integration environment for connection to BMS. A set of system calls and example clients, including source code, are provided to assist with development of integration solutions and custom clients.

As well as control and status

reflection of the lighting system, alarm events such circuit breaker trips and lamp failures can be automatically forwarded to the BMS. Diagnostic and maintenance data such as lamp burn time is also readily available.

infrared infrared reception Philips Dynalite sensors are multi-function devices; incorporating motion detection, light level measurement and infrared reception. Infrared signals from hand held remote controls are received by the sensors and can be translated into DyNet messages, which can then recall a lighting scene of trigger Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration

Page 5 of 9

a complex task. These messages can also be translated into other formats via network gateways, such as into ASCII text strings via the DNG232 Network Gateway or back into infrared via the DIRTX8 Infrared Transmitter.

Philips Dynalite offers a range of hand-held remote controls for use with the Philips

Dynalite sensor range. The codes from these remote controls can be used to program most models of unified programmable or „leaner‟ remote controls.

infrared transmission The DIRTX8 Infrared Transmitter is an 8-channel device, commonly used to integrate equipment with an IR port, such as AV controllers and airconditioners, onto the DyNet network. These IR transmissions can be triggered from any Philips Dynalite user interface such as a pushbutton panel or even a motion sensor. Multiple IR codes can be programmed to transmit with the press of one button by using the inbuilt task engine. A typical situation is where small IR emitters are fixed to the IR window of Hi-Fi equipment. The IR emitter includes a one-metre lead terminated with a 2.5mm plug, which is plugged into the DIRTX8. Multiple channels allow the DIRTX8 to transmit individual codes out on each channel, which eliminates problems where different Hi-Fi components share the same code. The DIRTX8 can record and store macros that are executed in response to DyNet messages on the RS485 network.

analogue and dry contact inputs For receiving analogue and dry contract inputs, the DDMIDC8 unit meets the integration requirements. The unit can receive eight dry contact inputs and four analogue inputs. When a dry contact closure is detected, the unit can perform a wide variety of functions such as recall a scene or perform a control room join. As the unit also has a task engine, multiple functions can be performed from a single contact closure. The unit can also receive 1-10V analogue input and directly translated this into Dynet channel level messages. Both styles of inputs can be used at the same time so that when a contact closure is detected the analogue inputs are then enabled. This kind of function could allow a user who wants to use a single rotary pot to control very large lighting loads that could not normally be controlled in such a format.

dry contact outputs Philips Dynalite offers several dry contact units that can be used for interfaces, as well as load control. Two of the more common models comprise eight sets of changeover contacts for added flexibility; the DDRC810DT-GL (DIN rail mount) and the DRC810DT (wall mount).

These outputs are suitable for

connection to SELV circuits. Page 6 of 9


Supply: 230V 0.1A 1 Phase

Dry Contact & Analogue Inputs IN5

IN4 IN3

IN2

IN1

A/D

IN6

A/D

A/D

A/D

SHIELD

IN7

A/D

IN8

A/D

0V

A/D

5V

A/D

E N L

GND DyNet RS485

D+ D+15V AUX

µP

C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC

CH8

CH7

CH6

CH5

CH4

CH3

CH2

CH1

Dry Contact Outputs

The electrical drawing above is of the DRC810DT. Note that in addition to the dry contact outputs, this device also has the eight programmable dry contact/analogue inputs described earlier.

analogue outputs Philips Dynalite ballast controllers can be configured for 0-10V output, providing a ready means of communicating a control variable to another system. The DDBC1200 illustrated below should be used where connection to SELV circuits is required. Supply: 230V 0.5A 1 Phase E N L

0-10V / DSI

0-10V / DSI

0-10V / DSI

0-10V / DSI

0-10V / DSI

0-10V / DSI

0-10V / DSI

0-10V / DSI

µP

0-10V / DSI

D-

AUX

0-10V / DSI

D+

+15V

0-10V / DSI

0-10V / DSI

GND

CH1 0 CH2 0 CH3 0 CH4 0 CH5 0 CH6 0 CH7 0 CH8 0 CH9 0 CH10 0 CH11 0 CH12 0

DMX512 dual port load controllers Many Philips Dynalite load controllers are available with dual ports, which allow a separate control network for DMX512 signals, while still allowing the use of the main control system. The DyNet network can be used to control the behavior of the system in response to DMX signals, such as the selection of the circuits for which DMX512 control is allowed. It is also possible to only allow partial control of a circuit via DMX512, in the form of setting a “low limit”, which is useful for allowing partial control of critical circuits such as egress lighting, but never allowing these circuits to be switched off or dimmed to an unacceptably low level.


Page 7 of 9

The diagram above illustrates the use of dual port load controllers.

converting Dynet to DMX512 A common requirement for buildings such as hotels, museums and other sites with a lighting control system is to connect outdoor architectural lighting to the Philips Dynalite network. Often this style of fixture operates on DMX512 communication protocol.

The Philips Dynalite DNG485 Network Bridge

converts DyNet into 64xchannels of DMX512 signals.

converting DMX512 to Dynet DMX512 can also be converted into DyNet channel level messages. This would be typically be achieved by connecting a theatrical lighting desk onto a DyNet network gateway DNG232, removing the need for the lighting control devices to be double ported for DMX512, apart from a single interface. This method

Page 8 of 9


should only be used for smaller systems requiring 16 channels of DMX512 addressing of the lighting control system.

 2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet, Envision and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.  LonWorks & LON are the registered trademarks of  Echelon Corporation. Wi-Fi is the registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Allliance.  Palm Pilot is the registered trademark of palmOne Inc.  HyperTerminal is the registered trademark of Hilgraeve Inc.  ActiveX is the registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.


Page 9 of 9

2011 Technical Binder

Recommend Documents